Scripture · Sanskrit Bible with the King James Version · the Pāli Canon

Search Scripture Search

Long Discourses 23 दीघनिकाय 23

Chapter: 12345678910111213141516171819202122232425262728293031323334

Pāyāsisutta

Pāli in Devanagari; under each word its Roman pronunciation, syllable by syllable (ṃ = nasal hum). Tap a Pāli word for its meaning (PTS Pāli-English Dictionary); tap again to open it in the Pāli dictionary.

Verse: 123456789101112131415161718192021222324252627282930313233343536373839404142434445464748495051525354555657585960616263646566676869707172737475767778798081828384858687888990919293949596979899100101102103104105106107108109110111112113114115116117118119120121122123124125126127128129130131132133134135136137138139140141142143144145146147148149150151152153154155156157158159160161162163164165166167168169170171172173174175176177178179180181182183184185186187188189190191192193194195196197198199200201202203204205206207208209210211212213214215216217218219220221222223224225226227228229230231232233234235236237238239240241242243244245246247248249250251252253254255256257258259260261262263264265266267268269270271272273274275276277278279280281282283284285286287288289290291292293294295296297298299300301302303304305306307308309310311312313314315316317318319320321322323324325326327328329330331332333334335336337338339340341342343344345346347348349350351352353354355356357358359360361362363364365366367368369370371372373374375376377378379380381382383384385386387388389390391392393394395396397398399400401402403404405406407408409410411412413414415416417418419420421422423424425426427428429430431432433434435436437438439440441442443444445446447448449450451452453454455456457458459460461462463464465466467468469470471472473474475476477478479480481482483484485486487488489490491492493494495496497498499500501502503504505506507508509510511512513514515516517518519520521522523524525526527528529530531532533534535536537538539540541542543544545546547548549550551552553554555556557558559560561562563564565566567568569570571572573574575576577578579580581582583584585586587588589590591592593594595596597598599600601602603604605606607608609610611612613614615616617618619620621622623624625626627628629630631632633634635636637638639640641642643644645646647648649650651652653654655656657658659660661662663664665666667668669670671672673674675676677678679680681682683684685686687688689690691692693694695696697698699700701702703704705706707708709710711712713714715 · Hide pronunciation

1. 1

   दीघdī·gha निकायni·kā·ya 23

   Dīgha Nikāya 23

   Long Discourses 23

2. 2

   पायासिसुत्तpā·yā·si·sut·ta

   Pāyāsisutta

   With Pāyāsi

3. 3

   एवंe·vaṃ मेme सुतं—su·taṃ

   Evaṁ me sutaṁ—

   So I have heard.

4. 4

   एकंe·kaṃ समयंsa·ma·yaṃ आयस्माā·yas·mā कुमारकस्सपोku·mā·ra·kas·sa·po कोसलेसुko·sa·le·su चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no महताma·ha·tā भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ पञ्चमत्तेहिpañ·ca·mat·te·hi भिक्खुसतेहिbhik·khu·sa·te·hi येनye·na सेतब्याse·tab·yā नामnā·ma कोसलानंko·sa·lā·naṃ नगरंna·ga·raṃ तदवसरि।ta·da·va·sa·ri

   ekaṁ samayaṁ āyasmā kumārakassapo kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi yena setabyā nāma kosalānaṁ nagaraṁ tadavasari.

   At one time Venerable Kassapa the Prince was wandering in the land of the Kosalans together with a large Saṅgha of five hundred mendicants when he arrived at a Kosalan citadel named Setavyā.

5. 5

   तत्रtat·ra सुदंsu·daṃ आयस्माā·yas·mā कुमारकस्सपोku·mā·ra·kas·sa·po सेतब्यायंse·tab·yā·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti उत्तरेनut·ta·re·na सेतब्यंse·tab·yaṃ सिंसपावने।siṃ·sa·pā·va·ne

   Tatra sudaṁ āyasmā kumārakassapo setabyāyaṁ viharati uttarena setabyaṁ siṁsapāvane.

   He stayed in the rosewood grove to the north of Setavyā.

6. 6

   तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño सेतब्यंse·tab·yaṃ अज्झावसतिaj·jhā·va·sa·ti सत्तुस्सदंsat·tus·sa·daṃ सतिणकट्ठोदकंsa·ti·ṇa·kaṭ·ṭho·da·kaṃ सधञ्ञंsa·dhañ·ñaṃ राजभोग्गंrā·ja·bhog·gaṃ रञ्ञाrañ·ñā पसेनदिनाpa·se·na·di·nā कोसलेनko·sa·le·na दिन्नंdin·naṃ राजदायंrā·ja·dā·yaṃ ब्रह्मदेय्यं।brah·ma·dey·yaṃ

   Tena kho pana samayena pāyāsi rājañño setabyaṁ ajjhāvasati sattussadaṁ satiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ sadhaññaṁ rājabhoggaṁ raññā pasenadinā kosalena dinnaṁ rājadāyaṁ brahmadeyyaṁ.

   Now at that time the chieftain Pāyāsi was living in Setavyā. It was a crown property given by King Pasenadi of Kosala, teeming with living creatures, full of hay, wood, water, and grain, a royal park endowed to a brahmin.

7. 7

   1। पायासिराजञ्ञवत्थुpā·yā·si·rā·jañ·ña·vat·thu

   1. Pāyāsirājaññavatthu

   1. On Pāyāsi

8. 8

   तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na पायासिस्सpā·yā·sis·sa राजञ्ञस्सrā·jañ·ñas·sa एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतंdiṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ उप्पन्नंup·pan·naṃ होति:ho·ti

   Tena kho pana samayena pāyāsissa rājaññassa evarūpaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ uppannaṁ hoti:

   Now at that time Pāyāsi had the following harmful misconception:

9. 9

   “इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको”ति।vi·pā·ko

   “itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko”ti.

   “There is no afterlife. No beings are reborn spontaneously. There’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds.”

10. 10

    अस्सोसुंas·so·suṃ खोkho सेतब्यकाse·tab·ya·kā ब्राह्मणगहपतिका:brāh·ma·ṇa·ga·ha·pa·ti·kā

    Assosuṁ kho setabyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā:

    The brahmins and householders of Setavyā heard,

11. 11

    “समणोsa·ma·ṇo खलुkha·lu भोbho कुमारकस्सपोku·mā·ra·kas·sa·po समणस्सsa·ma·ṇas·sa गोतमस्सgo·ta·mas·sa सावकोsā·va·ko कोसलेसुko·sa·le·su चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no महताma·ha·tā भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ पञ्चमत्तेहिpañ·ca·mat·te·hi भिक्खुसतेहिbhik·khu·sa·te·hi सेतब्यंse·tab·yaṃ अनुप्पत्तोa·nup·pat·to सेतब्यायंse·tab·yā·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti उत्तरेनut·ta·re·na सेतब्यंse·tab·yaṃ सिंसपावने।siṃ·sa·pā·va·ne

    “samaṇo khalu bho kumārakassapo samaṇassa gotamassa sāvako kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi setabyaṁ anuppatto setabyāyaṁ viharati uttarena setabyaṁ siṁsapāvane.

    “It seems the ascetic Kassapa the Prince—a disciple of the ascetic Gotama—is staying in the rosewood grove to the north of Setavyā.

12. 12

    तंtaṃ खोkho पनpa·na भवन्तंbha·van·taṃ कुमारकस्सपंku·mā·ra·kas·sa·paṃ एवंe·vaṃ कल्याणोkal·yā·ṇo कित्तिसद्दोkit·ti·sad·do अब्भुग्गतो:ab·bhug·ga·to

    Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ kumārakassapaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato:

    He has this good reputation:

13. 13

    ‘पण्डितोpaṇ·ḍi·to ब्यत्तोbyat·to मेधावीme·dhā·vī बहुस्सुतोba·hus·su·to चित्तकथीcit·ta·ka·thī कल्याणपटिभानोkal·yā·ṇa·pa·ṭi·bhā·no वुद्धोvud·dho चेवce·va अरहाa·ra·hā च।ca

    ‘paṇḍito byatto medhāvī bahussuto cittakathī kalyāṇapaṭibhāno vuddho ceva arahā ca.

    ‘He is astute, competent, intelligent, learned, a brilliant speaker, eloquent, mature, a perfected one.’

14. 14

    साधुsā·dhu खोkho पनpa·na तथारूपानंta·thā·rū·pā·naṃ अरहतंa·ra·ha·taṃ दस्सनंdas·sa·naṃ होती’”ति।ho·tī

    Sādhu kho pana tathārūpānaṁ arahataṁ dassanaṁ hotī’”ti.

    It’s good to see such perfected ones.”

15. 15

    अथa·tha खोkho सेतब्यकाse·tab·ya·kā ब्राह्मणगहपतिकाbrāh·ma·ṇa·ga·ha·pa·ti·kā सेतब्यायse·tab·yā·ya निक्खमित्वाnik·kha·mit·vā सङ्घसङ्घीsaṅ·gha·saṅ·ghī गणीभूताga·ṇī·bhū·tā उत्तरेनमुखाut·ta·re·na·mu·khā गच्छन्तिgac·chan·ti येनye·na सिंसपावनं।siṃ·sa·pā·va·naṃ

    Atha kho setabyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā setabyāya nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūtā uttarenamukhā gacchanti yena siṁsapāvanaṁ.

    Then, exiting Setavyā, they formed into companies and headed north to the grove.

16. 16

    तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño उपरिपासादेu·pa·ri·pā·sā·de दिवासेय्यंdi·vā·sey·yaṃ उपगतोu·pa·ga·to होति।ho·ti

    Tena kho pana samayena pāyāsi rājañño uparipāsāde divāseyyaṁ upagato hoti.

    Now at that time the chieftain Pāyāsi had retired to the upper floor of his stilt longhouse for his midday nap.

17. 17

    अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño सेतब्यकेse·tab·ya·ke ब्राह्मणगहपतिकेbrāh·ma·ṇa·ga·ha·pa·ti·ke सेतब्यायse·tab·yā·ya निक्खमित्वाnik·kha·mit·vā सङ्घसङ्घीsaṅ·gha·saṅ·ghī गणीभूतेga·ṇī·bhū·te उत्तरेनमुखेut·ta·re·na·mu·khe गच्छन्तेgac·chan·te येनye·na सिंसपावनं,siṃ·sa·pā·va·naṃ

    Addasā kho pāyāsi rājañño setabyake brāhmaṇagahapatike setabyāya nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūte uttarenamukhe gacchante yena siṁsapāvanaṁ,

    He saw the brahmins and householders heading north toward the grove,

18. 18

    दिस्वाdis·vā खत्तंkhat·taṃ आमन्तेसि:ā·man·te·si

    disvā khattaṁ āmantesi:

    and addressed his butler,

19. 19

    “किंkiṃ नुnu खो,kho भोbho खत्ते,khat·te सेतब्यकाse·tab·ya·kā ब्राह्मणगहपतिकाbrāh·ma·ṇa·ga·ha·pa·ti·kā सेतब्यायse·tab·yā·ya निक्खमित्वाnik·kha·mit·vā सङ्घसङ्घीsaṅ·gha·saṅ·ghī गणीभूताga·ṇī·bhū·tā उत्तरेनमुखाut·ta·re·na·mu·khā गच्छन्तिgac·chan·ti येनye·na सिंसपावनन्”ति?siṃ·sa·pā·va·nan

    “kiṁ nu kho, bho khatte, setabyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā setabyāya nikkhamitvā saṅghasaṅghī gaṇībhūtā uttarenamukhā gacchanti yena siṁsapāvanan”ti?

    “My butler, why are the brahmins and householders heading north toward the grove?”

20. 20

    “अत्थिat·thi खो,kho भो,bho समणोsa·ma·ṇo कुमारकस्सपो,ku·mā·ra·kas·sa·po समणस्सsa·ma·ṇas·sa गोतमस्सgo·ta·mas·sa सावकोsā·va·ko कोसलेसुko·sa·le·su चारिकंcā·ri·kaṃ चरमानोca·ra·mā·no महताma·ha·tā भिक्खुसङ्घेनbhik·khu·saṅ·ghe·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ पञ्चमत्तेहिpañ·ca·mat·te·hi भिक्खुसतेहिbhik·khu·sa·te·hi सेतब्यंse·tab·yaṃ अनुप्पत्तोa·nup·pat·to सेतब्यायंse·tab·yā·yaṃ विहरतिvi·ha·ra·ti उत्तरेनut·ta·re·na सेतब्यंse·tab·yaṃ सिंसपावने।siṃ·sa·pā·va·ne

    “Atthi kho, bho, samaṇo kumārakassapo, samaṇassa gotamassa sāvako kosalesu cārikaṁ caramāno mahatā bhikkhusaṅghena saddhiṁ pañcamattehi bhikkhusatehi setabyaṁ anuppatto setabyāyaṁ viharati uttarena setabyaṁ siṁsapāvane.

    “The ascetic Kassapa the Prince—a disciple of the ascetic Gotama—is staying in the rosewood grove to the north of Setavyā.

21. 21

    तंtaṃ खोkho पनpa·na भवन्तंbha·van·taṃ कुमारकस्सपंku·mā·ra·kas·sa·paṃ एवंe·vaṃ कल्याणोkal·yā·ṇo कित्तिसद्दोkit·ti·sad·do अब्भुग्गतो:ab·bhug·ga·to

    Taṁ kho pana bhavantaṁ kumārakassapaṁ evaṁ kalyāṇo kittisaddo abbhuggato:

    He has this good reputation:

22. 22

    ‘पण्डितोpaṇ·ḍi·to ब्यत्तोbyat·to मेधावीme·dhā·vī बहुस्सुतोba·hus·su·to चित्तकथीcit·ta·ka·thī कल्याणपटिभानोkal·yā·ṇa·pa·ṭi·bhā·no वुद्धोvud·dho चेवce·va अरहाa·ra·hā चा’ति।cā

    ‘paṇḍito byatto medhāvī bahussuto cittakathī kalyāṇapaṭibhāno vuddho ceva arahā cā’ti.

    ‘He is astute, competent, intelligent, learned, a brilliant speaker, eloquent, mature, a perfected one.’

23. 23

    तमेतेta·me·te भवन्तंbha·van·taṃ कुमारकस्सपंku·mā·ra·kas·sa·paṃ दस्सनायdas·sa·nā·ya उपसङ्कमन्ती”ति।u·pa·saṅ·ka·man·tī

    Tamete bhavantaṁ kumārakassapaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamantī”ti.

    They’re going to see that Kassapa the Prince.”

24. 24

    “तेनte·na हि,hi भोbho खत्ते,khat·te येनye·na सेतब्यकाse·tab·ya·kā ब्राह्मणगहपतिकाbrāh·ma·ṇa·ga·ha·pa·ti·kā तेनुपसङ्कम;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·ma उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā सेतब्यकेse·tab·ya·ke ब्राह्मणगहपतिकेbrāh·ma·ṇa·ga·ha·pa·ti·ke एवंe·vaṃ वदेहि:va·de·hi

    “Tena hi, bho khatte, yena setabyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā tenupasaṅkama; upasaṅkamitvā setabyake brāhmaṇagahapatike evaṁ vadehi:

    “Well then, go to the brahmins and householders and say to them:

25. 25

    ‘पायासि,pā·yā·si भो,bho राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño एवमाह—e·va·mā·ha

    ‘pāyāsi, bho, rājañño evamāha—

    ‘Worthy sir, the chieftain Pāyāsi asks

26. 26

    आगमेन्तुā·ga·men·tu किरki·ra भवन्तो,bha·van·to पायासिपिpā·yā·si·pi राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño समणंsa·ma·ṇaṃ कुमारकस्सपंku·mā·ra·kas·sa·paṃ दस्सनायdas·sa·nā·ya उपसङ्कमिस्सती’ति।u·pa·saṅ·ka·mis·sa·tī

    āgamentu kira bhavanto, pāyāsipi rājañño samaṇaṁ kumārakassapaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī’ti.

    you to wait, as he will also go to see the ascetic Kassapa the Prince.’

27. 27

    पुराpu·rā समणोsa·ma·ṇo कुमारकस्सपोku·mā·ra·kas·sa·po सेतब्यकेse·tab·ya·ke ब्राह्मणगहपतिकेbrāh·ma·ṇa·ga·ha·pa·ti·ke बालेbā·le अब्यत्तेab·yat·te सञ्ञापेति:sañ·ñā·pe·ti

    Purā samaṇo kumārakassapo setabyake brāhmaṇagahapatike bāle abyatte saññāpeti:

    Before Kassapa the Prince persuades those foolish and incompetent brahmins and householders that

28. 28

    ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi अत्थिat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko अत्थिat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā अत्थिat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’ति।vi·pā·ko

    ‘itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’ti.

    there is an afterlife, there are beings reborn spontaneously, and there is a fruit or result of good and bad deeds—

29. 29

    नत्थिnat·thi हि,hi भोbho खत्ते,khat·te परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको”ति।vi·pā·ko

    Natthi hi, bho khatte, paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko”ti.

    for none of these things are true!”

30. 30

    “एवं,e·vaṃ भो”तिbho खोkho सोso खत्ताkhat·tā पायासिस्सpā·yā·sis·sa राजञ्ञस्सrā·jañ·ñas·sa पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā येनye·na सेतब्यकाse·tab·ya·kā ब्राह्मणगहपतिकाbrāh·ma·ṇa·ga·ha·pa·ti·kā तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā सेतब्यकेse·tab·ya·ke ब्राह्मणगहपतिकेbrāh·ma·ṇa·ga·ha·pa·ti·ke एतदवोच:e·ta·da·vo·ca

    “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho so khattā pāyāsissa rājaññassa paṭissutvā yena setabyakā brāhmaṇagahapatikā tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā setabyake brāhmaṇagahapatike etadavoca:

    “Yes, worthy sir,” replied the butler, and did as he was asked.

31. 31

    “पायासि,pā·yā·si भो,bho राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño एवमाह,e·va·mā·ha आगमेन्तुā·ga·men·tu किरki·ra भवन्तो,bha·van·to पायासिपिpā·yā·si·pi राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño समणंsa·ma·ṇaṃ कुमारकस्सपंku·mā·ra·kas·sa·paṃ दस्सनायdas·sa·nā·ya उपसङ्कमिस्सती”ति।u·pa·saṅ·ka·mis·sa·tī

    “pāyāsi, bho, rājañño evamāha, āgamentu kira bhavanto, pāyāsipi rājañño samaṇaṁ kumārakassapaṁ dassanāya upasaṅkamissatī”ti.

    (Pāli only)

32. 32

    अथa·tha खोkho पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño सेतब्यकेहिse·tab·ya·ke·hi ब्राह्मणगहपतिकेहिbrāh·ma·ṇa·ga·ha·pa·ti·ke·hi परिवुतोpa·ri·vu·to येनye·na सिंसपावनंsiṃ·sa·pā·va·naṃ येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā कुमारकस्सपोku·mā·ra·kas·sa·po तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā आयस्मताā·yas·ma·tā कुमारकस्सपेनku·mā·ra·kas·sa·pe·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ सम्मोदि,sam·mo·di सम्मोदनीयंsam·mo·da·nī·yaṃ कथंka·thaṃ सारणीयंsā·ra·ṇī·yaṃ वीतिसारेत्वाvī·ti·sā·ret·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

    Atha kho pāyāsi rājañño setabyakehi brāhmaṇagahapatikehi parivuto yena siṁsapāvanaṁ yenāyasmā kumārakassapo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmatā kumārakassapena saddhiṁ sammodi, sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

    Then Pāyāsi escorted by the brahmins and householders, went up to Kassapa the Prince, and exchanged greetings with him. When the greetings and polite conversation were over, he sat down to one side.

33. 33

    सेतब्यकापिse·tab·ya·kā·pi खोkho ब्राह्मणगहपतिकाbrāh·ma·ṇa·ga·ha·pa·ti·kā अप्पेकच्चेap·pe·kac·ce आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ कुमारकस्सपंku·mā·ra·kas·sa·paṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु;ni·sī·diṃ·su

    Setabyakāpi kho brāhmaṇagahapatikā appekacce āyasmantaṁ kumārakassapaṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu;

    Before sitting down to one side, some of the brahmins and householders of Setavyā bowed, some exchanged greetings and polite conversation, some held up their cupped palms toward Kassapa the Prince, some announced their name and clan, while some kept silent.

34. 34

    अप्पेकच्चेap·pe·kac·ce आयस्मताā·yas·ma·tā कुमारकस्सपेनku·mā·ra·kas·sa·pe·na सद्धिंsad·dhiṃ सम्मोदिंसु;sam·mo·diṃ·su

    appekacce āyasmatā kumārakassapena saddhiṁ sammodiṁsu;

    (Pāli only)

35. 35

    सम्मोदनीयंsam·mo·da·nī·yaṃ कथंka·thaṃ सारणीयंsā·ra·ṇī·yaṃ वीतिसारेत्वाvī·ti·sā·ret·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

    sammodanīyaṁ kathaṁ sāraṇīyaṁ vītisāretvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

    (Pāli only)

36. 36

    अप्पेकच्चेap·pe·kac·ce येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā कुमारकस्सपोku·mā·ra·kas·sa·po तेनञ्जलिंte·nañ·ja·liṃ पणामेत्वाpa·ṇā·met·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

    Appekacce yenāyasmā kumārakassapo tenañjaliṁ paṇāmetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

    (Pāli only)

37. 37

    अप्पेकच्चेap·pe·kac·ce नामगोत्तंnā·ma·got·taṃ सावेत्वाsā·vet·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

    Appekacce nāmagottaṁ sāvetvā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

    (Pāli only)

38. 38

    अप्पेकच्चेap·pe·kac·ce तुण्हीभूताtuṇ·hī·bhū·tā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदिंसु।ni·sī·diṃ·su

    Appekacce tuṇhībhūtā ekamantaṁ nisīdiṁsu.

    (Pāli only)

39. 39

    2। नत्थिकवादnat·thi·ka·vā·da

    2. Natthikavāda

    2. Nihilism

40. 40

    एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसिन्नोni·sin·no खोkho पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ कुमारकस्सपंku·mā·ra·kas·sa·paṃ एतदवोच:e·ta·da·vo·ca

    Ekamantaṁ nisinno kho pāyāsi rājañño āyasmantaṁ kumārakassapaṁ etadavoca:

    Seated to one side, the chieftain Pāyāsi said to Venerable Kassapa the Prince,

41. 41

    “अहञ्हि,a·hañ·hi भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa एवंवादीe·vaṃ·vā·dī एवंदिट्ठी:e·vaṃ·diṭ·ṭhī

    “ahañhi, bho kassapa, evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhī:

    “Worthy Kassapa, this is my doctrine and view:

42. 42

    ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

    ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

    ‘There is no afterlife. No beings are reborn spontaneously. There’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds.’”

43. 43

    “नाहं,nā·haṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña एवंवादिंe·vaṃ·vā·diṃ एवंदिट्ठिंe·vaṃ·diṭ·ṭhiṃ अद्दसंad·da·saṃ वाvā अस्सोसिंas·so·siṃ वा।vā

    “Nāhaṁ, rājañña, evaṁvādiṁ evaṁdiṭṭhiṁ addasaṁ vā assosiṁ vā.

    “Chieftain, may I never see or hear of anyone holding such a doctrine or view!

44. 44

    कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्य:va·dey·ya

    Kathañhi nāma evaṁ vadeyya:

    For how on earth can anyone say such a thing?

45. 45

    ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’ति?vi·pā·ko

    ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’ti?

    (Pāli only)

46. 46

    2।1। चन्दिमसूरियउपमाcan·di·ma·sū·ri·ya·u·pa·mā

    2.1. Candimasūriyaupamā

    2.1. The Simile of the Moon and Sun

47. 47

    तेनte·na हि,hi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña तञ्ञेवेत्थtañ·ñe·vet·tha पटिपुच्छिस्सामि,pa·ṭi·puc·chis·sā·mi यथाya·thā तेte खमेय्य,kha·mey·ya तथाta·thā नंnaṃ ब्याकरेय्यासि।byā·ka·rey·yā·si

    Tena hi, rājañña, taññevettha paṭipucchissāmi, yathā te khameyya, tathā naṁ byākareyyāsi.

    Well then, chieftain, I’ll ask you about this in return, and you can answer as you like.

48. 48

    तंtaṃ किंkiṃ मञ्ञसि,mañ·ña·si राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña

    Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rājañña,

    What do you think, chieftain?

49. 49

    इमेi·me चन्दिमसूरियाcan·di·ma·sū·ri·yā इमस्मिंi·mas·miṃ वाvā लोकेlo·ke परस्मिंpa·ras·miṃ वा,vā देवाde·vā वाvā तेte मनुस्साma·nus·sā वा”ति?vā

    ime candimasūriyā imasmiṁ vā loke parasmiṁ vā, devā vā te manussā vā”ti?

    Are the moon and sun in this world or the other world? Are they gods or humans?”

50. 50

    “इमे,i·me भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa चन्दिमसूरियाcan·di·ma·sū·ri·yā परस्मिंpa·ras·miṃ लोके,lo·ke नna इमस्मिं;i·mas·miṃ देवाde·vā तेte नna मनुस्सा”ति।ma·nus·sā

    “Ime, bho kassapa, candimasūriyā parasmiṁ loke, na imasmiṁ; devā te na manussā”ti.

    “They are in the other world, worthy Kassapa, and they are gods, not humans.”

51. 51

    “इमिनापिi·mi·nā·pi खोkho ते,te राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होतु—ho·tu

    “Imināpi kho te, rājañña, pariyāyena evaṁ hotu—

    “By this method it ought to be proven that

52. 52

    इतिपिi·ti·pi अत्थिat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko अत्थिat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā अत्थिat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको”ति।vi·pā·ko

    itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko”ti.

    there is an afterlife, there are beings reborn spontaneously, and there is a fruit or result of good and bad deeds.”

53. 53

    “किञ्चापिkiñ·cā·pi भवंbha·vaṃ कस्सपोkas·sa·po एवमाह,e·va·mā·ha अथa·tha खोkho एवंe·vaṃ मेme एत्थet·tha होति:ho·ti

    “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho evaṁ me ettha hoti:

    “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I think that

54. 54

    ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

    ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

    there is no afterlife, no beings are reborn spontaneously, and there’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds.”

55. 55

    “अत्थिat·thi पन,pa·na राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na तेte परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

    “Atthi pana, rājañña, pariyāyo, yena te pariyāyena evaṁ hoti:

    “Is there a method by which you can prove what you say?”

56. 56

    ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति?vi·pā·ko

    ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti?

    (Pāli only)

57. 57

    “अत्थि,at·thi भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मेme परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

    “Atthi, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti:

    “There is, worthy Kassapa.”

58. 58

    ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

    ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

    (Pāli only)

59. 59

    “यथाya·thā कथंka·thaṃ विय,vi·ya राजञ्ञा”ति?rā·jañ·ñā

    “Yathā kathaṁ viya, rājaññā”ti?

    “How, exactly, chieftain?”

60. 60

    “इधi·dha मे,me भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa मित्तामच्चाmit·tā·mac·cā ञातिसालोहिताñā·ti·sā·lo·hi·tā पाणातिपातीpā·ṇā·ti·pā·tī अदिन्नादायीa·din·nā·dā·yī कामेसुमिच्छाचारीkā·me·su·mic·chā·cā·rī मुसावादीmu·sā·vā·dī पिसुणवाचाpi·su·ṇa·vā·cā फरुसवाचाpha·ru·sa·vā·cā सम्फप्पलापीsam·phap·pa·lā·pī अभिज्झालूa·bhij·jhā·lū ब्यापन्नचित्ताbyā·pan·na·cit·tā मिच्छादिट्ठी।mic·chā·diṭ·ṭhī

    “Idha me, bho kassapa, mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī kāmesumicchācārī musāvādī pisuṇavācā pharusavācā samphappalāpī abhijjhālū byāpannacittā micchādiṭṭhī.

    “Well, I have friends and colleagues, relatives and kin who kill living creatures, steal, and commit sexual misconduct. They use speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical. And they’re covetous, malicious, with wrong view.

61. 61

    तेte अपरेनa·pa·re·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आबाधिकाā·bā·dhi·kā होन्तिhon·ti दुक्खिताduk·khi·tā बाळ्हगिलाना।bā·ḷha·gi·lā·nā

    Te aparena samayena ābādhikā honti dukkhitā bāḷhagilānā.

    Some time later they become sick, suffering, gravely ill.

62. 62

    यदाहंya·dā·haṃ जानामि:jā·nā·mi

    Yadāhaṁ jānāmi:

    When I know that

63. 63

    ‘नna दानिमेdā·ni·me इमम्हाi·mam·hā आबाधाā·bā·dhā वुट्ठहिस्सन्ती’तिvuṭ·ṭha·his·san·tī त्याहंtyā·haṃ उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एवंe·vaṃ वदामि:va·dā·mi

    ‘na dānime imamhā ābādhā vuṭṭhahissantī’ti tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi:

    they will not recover from their illness, I go to them and say,

64. 64

    ‘सन्तिsan·ti खो,kho भो,bho एकेe·ke समणब्राह्मणाsa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇā एवंवादिनोe·vaṃ·vā·di·no एवंदिट्ठिनो:e·vaṃ·diṭ·ṭhi·no

    ‘santi kho, bho, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino:

    ‘Worthy sir, there are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view:

65. 65

    “येye तेte पाणातिपातीpā·ṇā·ti·pā·tī अदिन्नादायीa·din·nā·dā·yī कामेसुमिच्छाचारीkā·me·su·mic·chā·cā·rī मुसावादीmu·sā·vā·dī पिसुणवाचाpi·su·ṇa·vā·cā फरुसवाचाpha·ru·sa·vā·cā सम्फप्पलापीsam·phap·pa·lā·pī अभिज्झालूa·bhij·jhā·lū ब्यापन्नचित्ताbyā·pan·na·cit·tā मिच्छादिट्ठी,mic·chā·diṭ·ṭhī तेte कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā अपायंa·pā·yaṃ दुग्गतिंdug·ga·tiṃ विनिपातंvi·ni·pā·taṃ निरयंni·ra·yaṃ उपपज्जन्ती”ति।u·pa·paj·jan·tī

    “ye te pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī kāmesumicchācārī musāvādī pisuṇavācā pharusavācā samphappalāpī abhijjhālū byāpannacittā micchādiṭṭhī, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjantī”ti.

    “Those who kill living creatures, steal, and commit sexual misconduct; use speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical; and are covetous, malicious, and have wrong view—when their body breaks up, after death, are reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.”

66. 66

    भवन्तोbha·van·to खोkho पाणातिपातीpā·ṇā·ti·pā·tī अदिन्नादायीa·din·nā·dā·yī कामेसुमिच्छाचारीkā·me·su·mic·chā·cā·rī मुसावादीmu·sā·vā·dī पिसुणवाचाpi·su·ṇa·vā·cā फरुसवाचाpha·ru·sa·vā·cā सम्फप्पलापीsam·phap·pa·lā·pī अभिज्झालूa·bhij·jhā·lū ब्यापन्नचित्ताbyā·pan·na·cit·tā मिच्छादिट्ठी।mic·chā·diṭ·ṭhī

    Bhavanto kho pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī kāmesumicchācārī musāvādī pisuṇavācā pharusavācā samphappalāpī abhijjhālū byāpannacittā micchādiṭṭhī.

    You do all these things.

67. 67

    सचेsa·ce तेसंte·saṃ भवतंbha·va·taṃ समणब्राह्मणानंsa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇā·naṃ सच्चंsac·caṃ वचनं,va·ca·naṃ भवन्तोbha·van·to कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā अपायंa·pā·yaṃ दुग्गतिंdug·ga·tiṃ विनिपातंvi·ni·pā·taṃ निरयंni·ra·yaṃ उपपज्जिस्सन्ति।u·pa·paj·jis·san·ti

    Sace tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ vacanaṁ, bhavanto kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjissanti.

    If what those ascetics and brahmins say is true, when your body breaks up, after death, you’ll be reborn in a place of loss, a bad place, the underworld, hell.

68. 68

    सचे,sa·ce भो,bho कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā अपायंa·pā·yaṃ दुग्गतिंdug·ga·tiṃ विनिपातंvi·ni·pā·taṃ निरयंni·ra·yaṃ उपपज्जेय्याथ,u·pa·paj·jey·yā·tha येनye·na मेme आगन्त्वाā·gan·tvā आरोचेय्याथ:ā·ro·cey·yā·tha

    Sace, bho, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapajjeyyātha, yena me āgantvā āroceyyātha:

    If that happens, worthy sir, come and tell me that

69. 69

    “इतिपिi·ti·pi अत्थिat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko अत्थिat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā अत्थिat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको”ति।vi·pā·ko

    “itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko”ti.

    there is an afterlife, there are beings reborn spontaneously, and there is a fruit or result of good and bad deeds.

70. 70

    भवन्तोbha·van·to खोkho पनpa·na मेme सद्धायिकाsad·dhā·yi·kā पच्चयिका,pac·ca·yi·kā यंyaṃ भवन्तेहिbha·van·te·hi दिट्ठं,diṭ·ṭhaṃ यथाya·thā सामंsā·maṃ दिट्ठंdiṭ·ṭhaṃ एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ भविस्सती’ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

    Bhavanto kho pana me saddhāyikā paccayikā, yaṁ bhavantehi diṭṭhaṁ, yathā sāmaṁ diṭṭhaṁ evametaṁ bhavissatī’ti.

    I trust you and believe you. Anything you see will be just as if I’ve seen it for myself.’

71. 71

    तेte मेme ‘साधू’तिsā·dhū पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā नेवne·va आगन्त्वाā·gan·tvā आरोचेन्ति,ā·ro·cen·ti नna पनpa·na दूतंdū·taṃ पहिणन्ति।pa·hi·ṇan·ti

    Te me ‘sādhū’ti paṭissutvā neva āgantvā ārocenti, na pana dūtaṁ pahiṇanti.

    They agree to this. But they don’t come back to tell me, nor do they send a messenger.

72. 72

    अयम्पिa·yam·pi खो,kho भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मेme परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

    Ayampi kho, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti:

    This is the method by which I prove that

73. 73

    ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

    ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

    there is no afterlife, no beings are reborn spontaneously, and there’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds.”

74. 74

    2।2। चोरउपमाco·ra·u·pa·mā

    2.2. Coraupamā

    2.2. The Simile of the Bandit

75. 75

    “तेनte·na हि,hi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña तञ्ञेवेत्थtañ·ñe·vet·tha पटिपुच्छिस्सामि।pa·ṭi·puc·chis·sā·mi यथाya·thā तेte खमेय्यkha·mey·ya तथाta·thā नंnaṃ ब्याकरेय्यासि।byā·ka·rey·yā·si

    “Tena hi, rājañña, taññevettha paṭipucchissāmi. Yathā te khameyya tathā naṁ byākareyyāsi.

    “Well then, chieftain, I’ll ask you about this in return, and you can answer as you like.

76. 76

    तंtaṃ किंkiṃ मञ्ञसि,mañ·ña·si राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña

    Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rājañña,

    What do you think, chieftain?

77. 77

    इधi·dha तेte पुरिसाpu·ri·sā चोरंco·raṃ आगुचारिंā·gu·cā·riṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā दस्सेय्युं:das·sey·yuṃ

    idha te purisā coraṁ āgucāriṁ gahetvā dasseyyuṁ:

    Suppose they were to arrest a bandit, a criminal and present him to you, saying,

78. 78

    ‘अयंa·yaṃ ते,te भन्ते,bhan·te चोरोco·ro आगुचारी;ā·gu·cā·rī

    ‘ayaṁ te, bhante, coro āgucārī;

    ‘Sir, this is a bandit, a criminal.

79. 79

    इमस्सi·mas·sa यंyaṃ इच्छसि,ic·cha·si तंtaṃ दण्डंdaṇ·ḍaṃ पणेही’ति।pa·ṇe·hī

    imassa yaṁ icchasi, taṁ daṇḍaṁ paṇehī’ti.

    Punish him as you will.’

80. 80

    तेte त्वंtvaṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्यासि:va·dey·yā·si

    Te tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi:

    Then you’d say to them,

81. 81

    ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भो,bho इमंi·maṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ दळ्हायda·ḷhā·ya रज्जुयाraj·ju·yā पच्छाबाहंpac·chā·bā·haṃ गाळ्हबन्धनंgā·ḷha·ban·dha·naṃ बन्धित्वाban·dhit·vā खुरमुण्डंkhu·ra·muṇ·ḍaṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā खरस्सरेनkha·ras·sa·re·na पणवेनpa·ṇa·ve·na रथिकायra·thi·kā·ya रथिकंra·thi·kaṃ सिङ्घाटकेनsiṅ·ghā·ṭa·ke·na सिङ्घाटकंsiṅ·ghā·ṭa·kaṃ परिनेत्वाpa·ri·net·vā दक्खिणेनdak·khi·ṇe·na द्वारेनdvā·re·na निक्खमित्वाnik·kha·mit·vā दक्खिणतोdak·khi·ṇa·to नगरस्सna·ga·ras·sa आघातनेā·ghā·ta·ne सीसंsī·saṃ छिन्दथा’ति।chin·da·thā

    ‘tena hi, bho, imaṁ purisaṁ daḷhāya rajjuyā pacchābāhaṁ gāḷhabandhanaṁ bandhitvā khuramuṇḍaṁ karitvā kharassarena paṇavena rathikāya rathikaṁ siṅghāṭakena siṅghāṭakaṁ parinetvā dakkhiṇena dvārena nikkhamitvā dakkhiṇato nagarassa āghātane sīsaṁ chindathā’ti.

    ‘Well then, my men, tie this man’s arms tightly behind his back with a strong rope. Shave his head and march him from street to street and square to square to the beating of a harsh drum. Then take him out the south gate and there, at the place of execution to the south of the city, chop off his head.’

82. 82

    तेte ‘साधू’तिsā·dhū पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā तंtaṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ दळ्हायda·ḷhā·ya रज्जुयाraj·ju·yā पच्छाबाहंpac·chā·bā·haṃ गाळ्हबन्धनंgā·ḷha·ban·dha·naṃ बन्धित्वाban·dhit·vā खुरमुण्डंkhu·ra·muṇ·ḍaṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā खरस्सरेनkha·ras·sa·re·na पणवेनpa·ṇa·ve·na रथिकायra·thi·kā·ya रथिकंra·thi·kaṃ सिङ्घाटकेनsiṅ·ghā·ṭa·ke·na सिङ्घाटकंsiṅ·ghā·ṭa·kaṃ परिनेत्वाpa·ri·net·vā दक्खिणेनdak·khi·ṇe·na द्वारेनdvā·re·na निक्खमित्वाnik·kha·mit·vā दक्खिणतोdak·khi·ṇa·to नगरस्सna·ga·ras·sa आघातनेā·ghā·ta·ne निसीदापेय्युं।ni·sī·dā·pey·yuṃ

    Te ‘sādhū’ti paṭissutvā taṁ purisaṁ daḷhāya rajjuyā pacchābāhaṁ gāḷhabandhanaṁ bandhitvā khuramuṇḍaṁ karitvā kharassarena paṇavena rathikāya rathikaṁ siṅghāṭakena siṅghāṭakaṁ parinetvā dakkhiṇena dvārena nikkhamitvā dakkhiṇato nagarassa āghātane nisīdāpeyyuṁ.

    Saying, ‘Good,’ they’d do as they were told, sitting him down at the place of execution.

83. 83

    लभेय्यla·bhey·ya नुnu खोkho सोso चोरोco·ro चोरघातेसु:co·ra·ghā·te·su

    Labheyya nu kho so coro coraghātesu:

    Could that bandit get the executioners to wait, saying,

84. 84

    ‘आगमेन्तुā·ga·men·tu तावtā·va भवन्तोbha·van·to चोरघाता,co·ra·ghā·tā अमुकस्मिंa·mu·kas·miṃ मेme गामेgā·me वाvā निगमेni·ga·me वाvā मित्तामच्चाmit·tā·mac·cā ञातिसालोहिता,ñā·ti·sā·lo·hi·tā यावाहंyā·vā·haṃ तेसंte·saṃ उद्दिसित्वाud·di·sit·vā आगच्छामी’ति,ā·gac·chā·mī उदाहुu·dā·hu विप्पलपन्तस्सेवvip·pa·la·pan·tas·se·va चोरघाताco·ra·ghā·tā सीसंsī·saṃ छिन्देय्युन्”ति?chin·dey·yun

    ‘āgamentu tāva bhavanto coraghātā, amukasmiṁ me gāme vā nigame vā mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā, yāvāhaṁ tesaṁ uddisitvā āgacchāmī’ti, udāhu vippalapantasseva coraghātā sīsaṁ chindeyyun”ti?

    ‘Please, good executioners! I have friends and colleagues, relatives and kin in such-and-such village or town. Wait until I’ve visited them, then I’ll come back’? Or would they just chop off his head as he prattled on?”

85. 85

    “नna हिhi सो,so भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa चोरोco·ro लभेय्यla·bhey·ya चोरघातेसु:co·ra·ghā·te·su

    “Na hi so, bho kassapa, coro labheyya coraghātesu:

    (Pāli only)

86. 86

    ‘आगमेन्तुā·ga·men·tu तावtā·va भवन्तोbha·van·to चोरघाताco·ra·ghā·tā अमुकस्मिंa·mu·kas·miṃ मेme गामेgā·me वाvā निगमेni·ga·me वाvā मित्तामच्चाmit·tā·mac·cā ञातिसालोहिता,ñā·ti·sā·lo·hi·tā यावाहंyā·vā·haṃ तेसंte·saṃ उद्दिसित्वाud·di·sit·vā आगच्छामी’ति।ā·gac·chā·mī

    ‘āgamentu tāva bhavanto coraghātā amukasmiṁ me gāme vā nigame vā mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā, yāvāhaṁ tesaṁ uddisitvā āgacchāmī’ti.

    (Pāli only)

87. 87

    अथa·tha खोkho नंnaṃ विप्पलपन्तस्सेवvip·pa·la·pan·tas·se·va चोरघाताco·ra·ghā·tā सीसंsī·saṃ छिन्देय्युन्”ति।chin·dey·yun

    Atha kho naṁ vippalapantasseva coraghātā sīsaṁ chindeyyun”ti.

    “They’d just chop off his head.”

88. 88

    “सोso हिhi नाम,nā·ma राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña चोरोco·ro मनुस्सोma·nus·so मनुस्सभूतेसुma·nus·sa·bhū·te·su चोरघातेसुco·ra·ghā·te·su नna लभिस्सति:la·bhis·sa·ti

    “So hi nāma, rājañña, coro manusso manussabhūtesu coraghātesu na labhissati:

    “So even a human bandit couldn’t get his human executioners to stay his execution.

89. 89

    ‘आगमेन्तुā·ga·men·tu तावtā·va भवन्तोbha·van·to चोरघाता,co·ra·ghā·tā अमुकस्मिंa·mu·kas·miṃ मेme गामेgā·me वाvā निगमेni·ga·me वाvā मित्तामच्चाmit·tā·mac·cā ञातिसालोहिता,ñā·ti·sā·lo·hi·tā यावाहंyā·vā·haṃ तेसंte·saṃ उद्दिसित्वाud·di·sit·vā आगच्छामी’ति।ā·gac·chā·mī

    ‘āgamentu tāva bhavanto coraghātā, amukasmiṁ me gāme vā nigame vā mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā, yāvāhaṁ tesaṁ uddisitvā āgacchāmī’ti.

    (Pāli only)

90. 90

    किंkiṃ पनpa·na तेte मित्तामच्चाmit·tā·mac·cā ञातिसालोहिताñā·ti·sā·lo·hi·tā पाणातिपातीpā·ṇā·ti·pā·tī अदिन्नादायीa·din·nā·dā·yī कामेसुमिच्छाचारीkā·me·su·mic·chā·cā·rī मुसावादीmu·sā·vā·dī पिसुणवाचाpi·su·ṇa·vā·cā फरुसवाचाpha·ru·sa·vā·cā सम्फप्पलापीsam·phap·pa·lā·pī अभिज्झालूa·bhij·jhā·lū ब्यापन्नचित्ताbyā·pan·na·cit·tā मिच्छादिट्ठी,mic·chā·diṭ·ṭhī तेte कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā अपायंa·pā·yaṃ दुग्गतिंdug·ga·tiṃ विनिपातंvi·ni·pā·taṃ निरयंni·ra·yaṃ उपपन्नाu·pa·pan·nā लभिस्सन्तिla·bhis·san·ti निरयपालेसु:ni·ra·ya·pā·le·su

    Kiṁ pana te mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā pāṇātipātī adinnādāyī kāmesumicchācārī musāvādī pisuṇavācā pharusavācā samphappalāpī abhijjhālū byāpannacittā micchādiṭṭhī, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā apāyaṁ duggatiṁ vinipātaṁ nirayaṁ upapannā labhissanti nirayapālesu:

    What then of your friends and colleagues, relatives and kin who are reborn in a lower realm after doing bad things? Could they get the wardens of hell to wait, saying,

91. 91

    ‘आगमेन्तुā·ga·men·tu तावtā·va भवन्तोbha·van·to निरयपाला,ni·ra·ya·pā·lā यावyā·va मयंma·yaṃ पायासिस्सpā·yā·sis·sa राजञ्ञस्सrā·jañ·ñas·sa गन्त्वाgan·tvā आरोचेम:ā·ro·ce·ma

    ‘āgamentu tāva bhavanto nirayapālā, yāva mayaṁ pāyāsissa rājaññassa gantvā ārocema:

    ‘Please, good wardens of hell! Wait until I’ve gone to the chieftain Pāyāsi to tell him that

92. 92

    “इतिपिi·ti·pi अत्थिat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko अत्थिat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā अत्थिat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको”’ति?vi·pā·ko

    “itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko”’ti?

    there is an afterlife, there are beings reborn spontaneously, and there is a fruit or result of good and bad deeds’?

93. 93

    इमिनापिi·mi·nā·pi खोkho ते,te राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होतु:ho·tu

    Imināpi kho te, rājañña, pariyāyena evaṁ hotu:

    By this method, too, it ought to be proven that

94. 94

    ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi अत्थिat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko अत्थिat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā अत्थिat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

    ‘itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

    there is an afterlife, there are beings reborn spontaneously, and there is a fruit or result of good and bad deeds.”

95. 95

    “किञ्चापिkiñ·cā·pi भवंbha·vaṃ कस्सपोkas·sa·po एवमाह,e·va·mā·ha अथa·tha खोkho एवंe·vaṃ मेme एत्थet·tha होति:ho·ti

    “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho evaṁ me ettha hoti:

    “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I think that

96. 96

    ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

    ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

    there is no afterlife.”

97. 97

    “अत्थिat·thi पन,pa·na राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na तेte परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

    “Atthi pana, rājañña, pariyāyo yena te pariyāyena evaṁ hoti:

    “Is there a method by which you can prove what you say?”

98. 98

    ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति?vi·pā·ko

    ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti?

    (Pāli only)

99. 99

    “अत्थि,at·thi भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मेme परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

    “Atthi, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti:

    “There is, worthy Kassapa.”

100. 100

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     (Pāli only)

101. 101

     “यथाya·thā कथंka·thaṃ विय,vi·ya राजञ्ञा”ति?rā·jañ·ñā

     “Yathā kathaṁ viya, rājaññā”ti?

     “How, exactly, chieftain?”

102. 102

     “इधi·dha मे,me भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa मित्तामच्चाmit·tā·mac·cā ञातिसालोहिताñā·ti·sā·lo·hi·tā पाणातिपाताpā·ṇā·ti·pā·tā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā अदिन्नादानाa·din·nā·dā·nā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā कामेसुमिच्छाचाराkā·me·su·mic·chā·cā·rā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā मुसावादाmu·sā·vā·dā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā पिसुणायpi·su·ṇā·ya वाचायvā·cā·ya पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā फरुसायpha·ru·sā·ya वाचायvā·cā·ya पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā सम्फप्पलापाsam·phap·pa·lā·pā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā अनभिज्झालूa·na·bhij·jhā·lū अब्यापन्नचित्ताab·yā·pan·na·cit·tā सम्मादिट्ठी।sam·mā·diṭ·ṭhī

     “Idha me, bho kassapa, mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā pisuṇāya vācāya paṭiviratā pharusāya vācāya paṭiviratā samphappalāpā paṭiviratā anabhijjhālū abyāpannacittā sammādiṭṭhī.

     “Well, I have friends and colleagues, relatives and kin who refrain from killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct. They refrain from speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical. And they’re content, kind-hearted, with right view.

103. 103

     तेte अपरेनa·pa·re·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आबाधिकाā·bā·dhi·kā होन्तिhon·ti दुक्खिताduk·khi·tā बाळ्हगिलाना।bā·ḷha·gi·lā·nā

     Te aparena samayena ābādhikā honti dukkhitā bāḷhagilānā.

     Some time later they become sick, suffering, gravely ill.

104. 104

     यदाहंya·dā·haṃ जानामि:jā·nā·mi

     Yadāhaṁ jānāmi:

     When I know that

105. 105

     ‘नna दानिमेdā·ni·me इमम्हाi·mam·hā आबाधाā·bā·dhā वुट्ठहिस्सन्ती’तिvuṭ·ṭha·his·san·tī त्याहंtyā·haṃ उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एवंe·vaṃ वदामि:va·dā·mi

     ‘na dānime imamhā ābādhā vuṭṭhahissantī’ti tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi:

     they will not recover from their illness, I go to them and say,

106. 106

     ‘सन्तिsan·ti खो,kho भो,bho एकेe·ke समणब्राह्मणाsa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇā एवंवादिनोe·vaṃ·vā·di·no एवंदिट्ठिनो:e·vaṃ·diṭ·ṭhi·no

     ‘santi kho, bho, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino:

     ‘Worthy sir, there are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view:

107. 107

     “येye तेte पाणातिपाताpā·ṇā·ti·pā·tā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā अदिन्नादानाa·din·nā·dā·nā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā कामेसुमिच्छाचाराkā·me·su·mic·chā·cā·rā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā मुसावादाmu·sā·vā·dā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā पिसुणायpi·su·ṇā·ya वाचायvā·cā·ya पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā फरुसायpha·ru·sā·ya वाचायvā·cā·ya पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā सम्फप्पलापाsam·phap·pa·lā·pā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā अनभिज्झालूa·na·bhij·jhā·lū अब्यापन्नचित्ताab·yā·pan·na·cit·tā सम्मादिट्ठीsam·mā·diṭ·ṭhī तेte कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ सग्गंsag·gaṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ उपपज्जन्ती”ति।u·pa·paj·jan·tī

     “ye te pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā pisuṇāya vācāya paṭiviratā pharusāya vācāya paṭiviratā samphappalāpā paṭiviratā anabhijjhālū abyāpannacittā sammādiṭṭhī te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjantī”ti.

     “Those who refrain from killing living creatures, stealing, and sexual misconduct; who refrain from speech that’s false, backbiting, harsh, or nonsensical; and are content, kind-hearted, with right view—when their body breaks up, after death, are reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.”

108. 108

     भवन्तोbha·van·to खोkho पाणातिपाताpā·ṇā·ti·pā·tā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā अदिन्नादानाa·din·nā·dā·nā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā कामेसुमिच्छाचाराkā·me·su·mic·chā·cā·rā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā मुसावादाmu·sā·vā·dā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā पिसुणायpi·su·ṇā·ya वाचायvā·cā·ya पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā फरुसायpha·ru·sā·ya वाचायvā·cā·ya पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā सम्फप्पलापाsam·phap·pa·lā·pā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā अनभिज्झालूa·na·bhij·jhā·lū अब्यापन्नचित्ताab·yā·pan·na·cit·tā सम्मादिट्ठी।sam·mā·diṭ·ṭhī

     Bhavanto kho pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā pisuṇāya vācāya paṭiviratā pharusāya vācāya paṭiviratā samphappalāpā paṭiviratā anabhijjhālū abyāpannacittā sammādiṭṭhī.

     You do all these things.

109. 109

     सचेsa·ce तेसंte·saṃ भवतंbha·va·taṃ समणब्राह्मणानंsa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇā·naṃ सच्चंsac·caṃ वचनं,va·ca·naṃ भवन्तोbha·van·to कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ सग्गंsag·gaṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ उपपज्जिस्सन्ति।u·pa·paj·jis·san·ti

     Sace tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ vacanaṁ, bhavanto kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjissanti.

     If what those ascetics and brahmins say is true, when your body breaks up, after death, you’ll be reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm.

110. 110

     सचे,sa·ce भो,bho कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ सग्गंsag·gaṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ उपपज्जेय्याथ,u·pa·paj·jey·yā·tha येनye·na मेme आगन्त्वाā·gan·tvā आरोचेय्याथ:ā·ro·cey·yā·tha

     Sace, bho, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjeyyātha, yena me āgantvā āroceyyātha:

     If that happens, worthy sir, come and tell me that

111. 111

     “इतिपिi·ti·pi अत्थिat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko अत्थिat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā अत्थिat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको”ति।vi·pā·ko

     “itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko”ti.

     there is an afterlife.

112. 112

     भवन्तोbha·van·to खोkho पनpa·na मेme सद्धायिकाsad·dhā·yi·kā पच्चयिका,pac·ca·yi·kā यंyaṃ भवन्तेहिbha·van·te·hi दिट्ठं,diṭ·ṭhaṃ यथाya·thā सामंsā·maṃ दिट्ठंdiṭ·ṭhaṃ एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ भविस्सती’ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

     Bhavanto kho pana me saddhāyikā paccayikā, yaṁ bhavantehi diṭṭhaṁ, yathā sāmaṁ diṭṭhaṁ evametaṁ bhavissatī’ti.

     I trust you and believe you. Anything you see will be just as if I’ve seen it for myself.’

113. 113

     तेte मेme ‘साधू’तिsā·dhū पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā नेवne·va आगन्त्वाā·gan·tvā आरोचेन्ति,ā·ro·cen·ti नna पनpa·na दूतंdū·taṃ पहिणन्ति।pa·hi·ṇan·ti

     Te me ‘sādhū’ti paṭissutvā neva āgantvā ārocenti, na pana dūtaṁ pahiṇanti.

     They agree to this. But they don’t come back to tell me, nor do they send a messenger.

114. 114

     अयम्पिa·yam·pi खो,kho भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मेme परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Ayampi kho, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti:

     This is the method by which I prove that

115. 115

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is no afterlife.”

116. 116

     2।3। गूथकूपपुरिसउपमाgū·tha·kū·pa·pu·ri·sa·u·pa·mā

     2.3. Gūthakūpapurisaupamā

     2.3. The Simile of the Sewer

117. 117

     “तेनte·na हि,hi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña उपमंu·pa·maṃ तेte करिस्सामि।ka·ris·sā·mi

     “Tena hi, rājañña, upamaṁ te karissāmi.

     “Well then, chieftain, I shall give you a simile.

118. 118

     उपमायu·pa·mā·ya म्’इधेकच्चेm विञ्ञूviñ·ñū पुरिसाpu·ri·sā भासितस्सbhā·si·tas·sa अत्थंat·thaṃ आजानन्ति।ā·jā·nan·ti

     Upamāya m’idhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti.

     For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said.

119. 119

     सेय्यथापि,sey·ya·thā·pi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña पुरिसोpu·ri·so गूथकूपेgū·tha·kū·pe ससीसकंsa·sī·sa·kaṃ निमुग्गोni·mug·go अस्स।as·sa

     Seyyathāpi, rājañña, puriso gūthakūpe sasīsakaṁ nimuggo assa.

     Suppose there were a man sunk over his head in a sewer.

120. 120

     अथa·tha त्वंtvaṃ पुरिसेpu·ri·se आणापेय्यासि:ā·ṇā·pey·yā·si

     Atha tvaṁ purise āṇāpeyyāsi:

     Then you were to order someone

121. 121

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भो,bho तंtaṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ तम्हाtam·hā गूथकूपाgū·tha·kū·pā उद्धरथा’ति।ud·dha·ra·thā

     ‘tena hi, bho, taṁ purisaṁ tamhā gūthakūpā uddharathā’ti.

     to pull him out of the sewer,

122. 122

     तेte ‘साधू’तिsā·dhū पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā तंtaṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ तम्हाtam·hā गूथकूपाgū·tha·kū·pā उद्धरेय्युं।ud·dha·rey·yuṃ

     Te ‘sādhū’ti paṭissutvā taṁ purisaṁ tamhā gūthakūpā uddhareyyuṁ.

     and they’d agree to do so.

123. 123

     तेte त्वंtvaṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्यासि:va·dey·yā·si

     Te tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi:

     Then you’d tell them to

124. 124

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भो,bho तस्सtas·sa पुरिसस्सpu·ri·sas·sa कायाkā·yā वेळुपेसिकाहिve·ḷu·pe·si·kā·hi गूथंgū·thaṃ सुनिम्मज्जितंsu·nim·maj·ji·taṃ निम्मज्जथा’ति।nim·maj·ja·thā

     ‘tena hi, bho, tassa purisassa kāyā veḷupesikāhi gūthaṁ sunimmajjitaṁ nimmajjathā’ti.

     carefully scrape the dung off that man’s body with bamboo scrapers,

125. 125

     तेte ‘साधू’तिsā·dhū पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā तस्सtas·sa पुरिसस्सpu·ri·sas·sa कायाkā·yā वेळुपेसिकाहिve·ḷu·pe·si·kā·hi गूथंgū·thaṃ सुनिम्मज्जितंsu·nim·maj·ji·taṃ निम्मज्जेय्युं।nim·maj·jey·yuṃ

     Te ‘sādhū’ti paṭissutvā tassa purisassa kāyā veḷupesikāhi gūthaṁ sunimmajjitaṁ nimmajjeyyuṁ.

     and they’d agree to do so.

126. 126

     तेte त्वंtvaṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्यासि:va·dey·yā·si

     Te tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi:

     Then you’d tell them to

127. 127

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भो,bho तस्सtas·sa पुरिसस्सpu·ri·sas·sa कायंkā·yaṃ पण्डुमत्तिकायpaṇ·ḍu·mat·ti·kā·ya तिक्खत्तुंtik·khat·tuṃ सुब्बट्टितंsub·baṭ·ṭi·taṃ उब्बट्टेथा’ति।ub·baṭ·ṭe·thā

     ‘tena hi, bho, tassa purisassa kāyaṁ paṇḍumattikāya tikkhattuṁ subbaṭṭitaṁ ubbaṭṭethā’ti.

     carefully scrub that man’s body down with pale clay three times,

128. 128

     तेte तस्सtas·sa पुरिसस्सpu·ri·sas·sa कायंkā·yaṃ पण्डुमत्तिकायpaṇ·ḍu·mat·ti·kā·ya तिक्खत्तुंtik·khat·tuṃ सुब्बट्टितंsub·baṭ·ṭi·taṃ उब्बट्टेय्युं।ub·baṭ·ṭey·yuṃ

     Te tassa purisassa kāyaṁ paṇḍumattikāya tikkhattuṁ subbaṭṭitaṁ ubbaṭṭeyyuṁ.

     and they’d do so.

129. 129

     तेte त्वंtvaṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्यासि:va·dey·yā·si

     Te tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi:

     Then you’d tell them to

130. 130

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भो,bho तंtaṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ तेलेनte·le·na अब्भञ्जित्वाab·bhañ·jit·vā सुखुमेनsu·khu·me·na चुण्णेनcuṇ·ṇe·na तिक्खत्तुंtik·khat·tuṃ सुप्पधोतंsup·pa·dho·taṃ करोथा’ति।ka·ro·thā

     ‘tena hi, bho, taṁ purisaṁ telena abbhañjitvā sukhumena cuṇṇena tikkhattuṁ suppadhotaṁ karothā’ti.

     smear that man’s body with oil, and carefully wash him down with fine paste three times,

131. 131

     तेte तंtaṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ तेलेनte·le·na अब्भञ्जित्वाab·bhañ·jit·vā सुखुमेनsu·khu·me·na चुण्णेनcuṇ·ṇe·na तिक्खत्तुंtik·khat·tuṃ सुप्पधोतंsup·pa·dho·taṃ करेय्युं।ka·rey·yuṃ

     Te taṁ purisaṁ telena abbhañjitvā sukhumena cuṇṇena tikkhattuṁ suppadhotaṁ kareyyuṁ.

     and they’d do so.

132. 132

     तेte त्वंtvaṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्यासि:va·dey·yā·si

     Te tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi:

     Then you’d tell them to

133. 133

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भो,bho तस्सtas·sa पुरिसस्सpu·ri·sas·sa केसमस्सुंke·sa·mas·suṃ कप्पेथा’ति।kap·pe·thā

     ‘tena hi, bho, tassa purisassa kesamassuṁ kappethā’ti.

     dress that man’s hair and beard,

134. 134

     तेte तस्सtas·sa पुरिसस्सpu·ri·sas·sa केसमस्सुंke·sa·mas·suṃ कप्पेय्युं।kap·pey·yuṃ

     Te tassa purisassa kesamassuṁ kappeyyuṁ.

     and they’d do so.

135. 135

     तेte त्वंtvaṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्यासि:va·dey·yā·si

     Te tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi:

     Then you’d tell them to

136. 136

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भो,bho तस्सtas·sa पुरिसस्सpu·ri·sas·sa महग्घञ्चma·hag·ghañ·ca मालंmā·laṃ महग्घञ्चma·hag·ghañ·ca विलेपनंvi·le·pa·naṃ महग्घानिma·hag·ghā·ni चca वत्थानिvat·thā·ni उपहरथा’ति।u·pa·ha·ra·thā

     ‘tena hi, bho, tassa purisassa mahagghañca mālaṁ mahagghañca vilepanaṁ mahagghāni ca vatthāni upaharathā’ti.

     provide that man with costly garlands, makeup, and clothes,

137. 137

     तेte तस्सtas·sa पुरिसस्सpu·ri·sas·sa महग्घञ्चma·hag·ghañ·ca मालंmā·laṃ महग्घञ्चma·hag·ghañ·ca विलेपनंvi·le·pa·naṃ महग्घानिma·hag·ghā·ni चca वत्थानिvat·thā·ni उपहरेय्युं।u·pa·ha·rey·yuṃ

     Te tassa purisassa mahagghañca mālaṁ mahagghañca vilepanaṁ mahagghāni ca vatthāni upahareyyuṁ.

     and they’d do so.

138. 138

     तेte त्वंtvaṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्यासि:va·dey·yā·si

     Te tvaṁ evaṁ vadeyyāsi:

     Then you’d tell them to

139. 139

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भो,bho तंtaṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ पासादंpā·sā·daṃ आरोपेत्वाā·ro·pet·vā पञ्चकामगुणानिpañ·ca·kā·ma·gu·ṇā·ni उपट्ठापेथा’ति।u·paṭ·ṭhā·pe·thā

     ‘tena hi, bho, taṁ purisaṁ pāsādaṁ āropetvā pañcakāmaguṇāni upaṭṭhāpethā’ti.

     bring that man up to the stilt longhouse and set him up with the five kinds of sensual stimulation,

140. 140

     तेte तंtaṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ पासादंpā·sā·daṃ आरोपेत्वाā·ro·pet·vā पञ्चकामगुणानिpañ·ca·kā·ma·gu·ṇā·ni उपट्ठापेय्युं।u·paṭ·ṭhā·pey·yuṃ

     Te taṁ purisaṁ pāsādaṁ āropetvā pañcakāmaguṇāni upaṭṭhāpeyyuṁ.

     and they’d do so.

141. 141

     तंtaṃ किंkiṃ मञ्ञसि,mañ·ña·si राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña

     Taṁ kiṁ maññasi, rājañña,

     What do you think, chieftain?

142. 142

     अपिa·pi नुnu तस्सtas·sa पुरिसस्सpu·ri·sas·sa सुन्हातस्सsun·hā·tas·sa सुविलित्तस्सsu·vi·lit·tas·sa सुकप्पितकेसमस्सुस्सsu·kap·pi·ta·ke·sa·mas·sus·sa आमुक्कमालाभरणस्सā·muk·ka·mā·lā·bha·ra·ṇas·sa ओदातवत्थवसनस्सo·dā·ta·vat·tha·va·sa·nas·sa उपरिपासादवरगतस्सu·pa·ri·pā·sā·da·va·ra·ga·tas·sa पञ्चहिpañ·ca·hi कामगुणेहिkā·ma·gu·ṇe·hi समप्पितस्सsa·map·pi·tas·sa समङ्गीभूतस्सsa·maṅ·gī·bhū·tas·sa परिचारयमानस्सpa·ri·cā·ra·ya·mā·nas·sa पुनदेवpu·na·de·va तस्मिंtas·miṃ गूथकूपेgū·tha·kū·pe निमुज्जितुकामताni·muj·ji·tu·kā·ma·tā अस्सा”ति?as·sā

     api nu tassa purisassa sunhātassa suvilittassa sukappitakesamassussa āmukkamālābharaṇassa odātavatthavasanassa uparipāsādavaragatassa pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitassa samaṅgībhūtassa paricārayamānassa punadeva tasmiṁ gūthakūpe nimujjitukāmatā assā”ti?

     Now that man is nicely bathed and anointed, with hair and beard dressed, bedecked with garlands and bracelets, dressed in white, supplied and provided with the five kinds of sensual stimulation upstairs in the royal longhouse. Would he want to plunge back into that sewer again?”

143. 143

     “नोno हिदं,hi·daṃ भोbho कस्सप”।kas·sa·pa

     “No hidaṁ, bho kassapa”.

     “No, worthy Kassapa.

144. 144

     “तंtaṃ किस्सkis·sa हेतु”?he·tu

     “Taṁ kissa hetu”?

     Why is that?

145. 145

     “असुचि,a·su·ci भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa गूथकूपोgū·tha·kū·po असुचिa·su·ci चेवce·va असुचिसङ्खातोa·su·ci·saṅ·khā·to चca दुग्गन्धोdug·gan·dho चca दुग्गन्धसङ्खातोdug·gan·dha·saṅ·khā·to चca जेगुच्छोje·guc·cho चca जेगुच्छसङ्खातोje·guc·cha·saṅ·khā·to चca पटिकूलोpa·ṭi·kū·lo चca पटिकूलसङ्खातोpa·ṭi·kū·la·saṅ·khā·to चा”ति।cā

     “Asuci, bho kassapa, gūthakūpo asuci ceva asucisaṅkhāto ca duggandho ca duggandhasaṅkhāto ca jeguccho ca jegucchasaṅkhāto ca paṭikūlo ca paṭikūlasaṅkhāto cā”ti.

     Because that sewer is filthy, stinking, disgusting, and repulsive, and it’s regarded as such.”

146. 146

     “एवमेवe·va·me·va खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña मनुस्साma·nus·sā देवानंde·vā·naṃ असुचीa·su·cī चेवce·va असुचिसङ्खाताa·su·ci·saṅ·khā·tā च,ca दुग्गन्धाdug·gan·dhā चca दुग्गन्धसङ्खाताdug·gan·dha·saṅ·khā·tā च,ca जेगुच्छाje·guc·chā चca जेगुच्छसङ्खाताje·guc·cha·saṅ·khā·tā च,ca पटिकूलाpa·ṭi·kū·lā चca पटिकूलसङ्खाताpa·ṭi·kū·la·saṅ·khā·tā च।ca

     “Evameva kho, rājañña, manussā devānaṁ asucī ceva asucisaṅkhātā ca, duggandhā ca duggandhasaṅkhātā ca, jegucchā ca jegucchasaṅkhātā ca, paṭikūlā ca paṭikūlasaṅkhātā ca.

     “In the same way, chieftain, to the gods, human beings are filthy, stinking, disgusting, and repulsive, and are regarded as such.

147. 147

     योजनसतंyo·ja·na·sa·taṃ खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña मनुस्सगन्धोma·nus·sa·gan·dho देवेde·ve उब्बाधति।ub·bā·dha·ti

     Yojanasataṁ kho, rājañña, manussagandho deve ubbādhati.

     The smell of humans reaches the gods even a hundred leagues away.

148. 148

     किंkiṃ पनpa·na तेte मित्तामच्चाmit·tā·mac·cā ञातिसालोहिताñā·ti·sā·lo·hi·tā पाणातिपाताpā·ṇā·ti·pā·tā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā अदिन्नादानाa·din·nā·dā·nā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā कामेसुमिच्छाचाराkā·me·su·mic·chā·cā·rā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā मुसावादाmu·sā·vā·dā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā पिसुणायpi·su·ṇā·ya वाचायvā·cā·ya पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā फरुसायpha·ru·sā·ya वाचायvā·cā·ya पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā सम्फप्पलापाsam·phap·pa·lā·pā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā अनभिज्झालूa·na·bhij·jhā·lū अब्यापन्नचित्ताab·yā·pan·na·cit·tā सम्मादिट्ठी,sam·mā·diṭ·ṭhī कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ सग्गंsag·gaṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ उपपन्नाu·pa·pan·nā तेte आगन्त्वाā·gan·tvā आरोचेस्सन्ति:ā·ro·ces·san·ti

     Kiṁ pana te mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā pisuṇāya vācāya paṭiviratā pharusāya vācāya paṭiviratā samphappalāpā paṭiviratā anabhijjhālū abyāpannacittā sammādiṭṭhī, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā te āgantvā ārocessanti:

     What then of your friends and colleagues, relatives and kin who are reborn in a higher realm after doing good things? Will they come back to tell you that

149. 149

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi अत्थिat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko अत्थिat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā अत्थिat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’ति?vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’ti?

     there is an afterlife?

150. 150

     इमिनापिi·mi·nā·pi खोkho ते,te राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होतु:ho·tu

     Imināpi kho te, rājañña, pariyāyena evaṁ hotu:

     By this method, too, it ought to be proven that

151. 151

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi अत्थिat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko अत्थिat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā अत्थिat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is an afterlife.”

152. 152

     “किञ्चापिkiñ·cā·pi भवंbha·vaṃ कस्सपोkas·sa·po एवमाह,e·va·mā·ha अथa·tha खोkho एवंe·vaṃ मेme एत्थet·tha होति:ho·ti

     “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho evaṁ me ettha hoti:

     “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I think that

153. 153

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is no afterlife.”

154. 154

     “अत्थिat·thi पन,pa·na राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo …पे…pe

     “Atthi pana, rājañña, pariyāyo …pe…

     “Can you prove it?”

155. 155

     “अत्थि,at·thi भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo …पे…pe

     “atthi, bho kassapa, pariyāyo …pe…

     “I can.”

156. 156

     यथाya·thā कथंka·thaṃ विय,vi·ya राजञ्ञाति?rā·jañ·ñā·ti

     yathā kathaṁ viya, rājaññāti?

     “How, exactly, chieftain?”

157. 157

     “इधi·dha मे,me भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa मित्तामच्चाmit·tā·mac·cā ञातिसालोहिताñā·ti·sā·lo·hi·tā पाणातिपाताpā·ṇā·ti·pā·tā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā अदिन्नादानाa·din·nā·dā·nā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā कामेसुमिच्छाचाराkā·me·su·mic·chā·cā·rā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā मुसावादाmu·sā·vā·dā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā सुरामेरयमज्जपमादट्ठानाsu·rā·me·ra·ya·maj·ja·pa·mā·daṭ·ṭhā·nā पटिविरता,pa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā

     “Idha me, bho kassapa, mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭiviratā,

     “Well, I have friends and colleagues, relatives and kin who refrain from killing living creatures and so on.

158. 158

     तेte अपरेनa·pa·re·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आबाधिकाā·bā·dhi·kā होन्तिhon·ti दुक्खिताduk·khi·tā बाळ्हगिलाना।bā·ḷha·gi·lā·nā

     te aparena samayena ābādhikā honti dukkhitā bāḷhagilānā.

     Some time later they become sick, suffering, gravely ill.

159. 159

     यदाहंya·dā·haṃ जानामि:jā·nā·mi

     Yadāhaṁ jānāmi:

     When I know that

160. 160

     ‘नna दानिमेdā·ni·me इमम्हाi·mam·hā आबाधाā·bā·dhā वुट्ठहिस्सन्ती’तिvuṭ·ṭha·his·san·tī त्याहंtyā·haṃ उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā एवंe·vaṃ वदामि:va·dā·mi

     ‘na dānime imamhā ābādhā vuṭṭhahissantī’ti tyāhaṁ upasaṅkamitvā evaṁ vadāmi:

     they will not recover from their illness, I go to them and say,

161. 161

     ‘सन्तिsan·ti खो,kho भो,bho एकेe·ke समणब्राह्मणाsa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇā एवंवादिनोe·vaṃ·vā·di·no एवंदिट्ठिनो:e·vaṃ·diṭ·ṭhi·no

     ‘santi kho, bho, eke samaṇabrāhmaṇā evaṁvādino evaṁdiṭṭhino:

     ‘Worthy sir, there are some ascetics and brahmins who have this doctrine and view:

162. 162

     “येye तेte पाणातिपाताpā·ṇā·ti·pā·tā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā अदिन्नादानाa·din·nā·dā·nā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā कामेसुमिच्छाचाराkā·me·su·mic·chā·cā·rā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā मुसावादाmu·sā·vā·dā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā सुरामेरयमज्जपमादट्ठानाsu·rā·me·ra·ya·maj·ja·pa·mā·daṭ·ṭhā·nā पटिविरता,pa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā तेte कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ सग्गंsag·gaṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ उपपज्जन्तिu·pa·paj·jan·ti देवानंde·vā·naṃ तावतिंसानंtā·va·tiṃ·sā·naṃ सहब्यतन्”ति।sa·hab·ya·tan

     “ye te pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭiviratā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjanti devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyatan”ti.

     “Those who refrain from killing living creatures and so on are reborn in a good place, a heavenly realm, in the company of the gods of the thirty-three.”

163. 163

     भवन्तोbha·van·to खोkho पाणातिपाताpā·ṇā·ti·pā·tā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā अदिन्नादानाa·din·nā·dā·nā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā कामेसुमिच्छाचाराkā·me·su·mic·chā·cā·rā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā मुसावादाmu·sā·vā·dā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā सुरामेरयमज्जपमादट्ठानाsu·rā·me·ra·ya·maj·ja·pa·mā·daṭ·ṭhā·nā पटिविरता।pa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā

     Bhavanto kho pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭiviratā.

     You do all these things.

164. 164

     सचेsa·ce तेसंte·saṃ भवतंbha·va·taṃ समणब्राह्मणानंsa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇā·naṃ सच्चंsac·caṃ वचनं,va·ca·naṃ भवन्तोbha·van·to कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ सग्गंsag·gaṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ उपपज्जिस्सन्ति,u·pa·paj·jis·san·ti देवानंde·vā·naṃ तावतिंसानंtā·va·tiṃ·sā·naṃ सहब्यतं।sa·hab·ya·taṃ

     Sace tesaṁ bhavataṁ samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ saccaṁ vacanaṁ, bhavanto kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjissanti, devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyataṁ.

     If what those ascetics and brahmins say is true, when your body breaks up, after death, you’ll be reborn in the company of the gods of the thirty-three.

165. 165

     सचे,sa·ce भो,bho कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ सग्गंsag·gaṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ उपपज्जेय्याथu·pa·paj·jey·yā·tha देवानंde·vā·naṃ तावतिंसानंtā·va·tiṃ·sā·naṃ सहब्यतं,sa·hab·ya·taṃ येनye·na मेme आगन्त्वाā·gan·tvā आरोचेय्याथ:ā·ro·cey·yā·tha

     Sace, bho, kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajjeyyātha devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyataṁ, yena me āgantvā āroceyyātha:

     If that happens, worthy sir, come and tell me that

166. 166

     “इतिपिi·ti·pi अत्थिat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko अत्थिat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā अत्थिat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको”ति।vi·pā·ko

     “itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko”ti.

     there is an afterlife.

167. 167

     भवन्तोbha·van·to खोkho पनpa·na मेme सद्धायिकाsad·dhā·yi·kā पच्चयिका,pac·ca·yi·kā यंyaṃ भवन्तेहिbha·van·te·hi दिट्ठं,diṭ·ṭhaṃ यथाya·thā सामंsā·maṃ दिट्ठंdiṭ·ṭhaṃ एवमेतंe·va·me·taṃ भविस्सती’ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

     Bhavanto kho pana me saddhāyikā paccayikā, yaṁ bhavantehi diṭṭhaṁ, yathā sāmaṁ diṭṭhaṁ evametaṁ bhavissatī’ti.

     I trust you and believe you. Anything you see will be just as if I’ve seen it for myself.’

168. 168

     तेte मेme ‘साधू’तिsā·dhū पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā नेवne·va आगन्त्वाā·gan·tvā आरोचेन्ति,ā·ro·cen·ti नna पनpa·na दूतंdū·taṃ पहिणन्ति।pa·hi·ṇan·ti

     Te me ‘sādhū’ti paṭissutvā neva āgantvā ārocenti, na pana dūtaṁ pahiṇanti.

     They agree to this. But they don’t come back to tell me, nor do they send a messenger.

169. 169

     अयम्पिa·yam·pi खो,kho भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मेme परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Ayampi kho, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti:

     This is how I prove that

170. 170

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is no afterlife.”

171. 171

     2।4। तावतिंसदेवउपमाtā·va·tiṃ·sa·de·va·u·pa·mā

     2.4. Tāvatiṁsadevaupamā

     2.4. The Simile of the gods of the thirty-three

172. 172

     “तेनte·na हि,hi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña तञ्ञेवेत्थtañ·ñe·vet·tha पटिपुच्छिस्सामि;pa·ṭi·puc·chis·sā·mi यथाya·thā तेte खमेय्य,kha·mey·ya तथाta·thā नंnaṃ ब्याकरेय्यासि।byā·ka·rey·yā·si

     “Tena hi, rājañña, taññevettha paṭipucchissāmi; yathā te khameyya, tathā naṁ byākareyyāsi.

     “Well then, chieftain, I’ll ask you about this in return, and you can answer as you like.

173. 173

     यंyaṃ खोkho पन,pa·na राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña मानुस्सकंmā·nus·sa·kaṃ वस्ससतं,vas·sa·sa·taṃ देवानंde·vā·naṃ तावतिंसानंtā·va·tiṃ·sā·naṃ एसोe·so एकोe·ko रत्तिन्दिवो,rat·tin·di·vo तायtā·ya रत्तियाrat·ti·yā तिंसरत्तियोtiṃ·sa·rat·ti·yo मासो,mā·so तेनte·na मासेनmā·se·na द्वादसमासियोdvā·da·sa·mā·si·yo संवच्छरो,saṃ·vac·cha·ro तेनte·na संवच्छरेनsaṃ·vac·cha·re·na दिब्बंdib·baṃ वस्ससहस्संvas·sa·sa·has·saṃ देवानंde·vā·naṃ तावतिंसानंtā·va·tiṃ·sā·naṃ आयुप्पमाणं।ā·yup·pa·mā·ṇaṃ

     Yaṁ kho pana, rājañña, mānussakaṁ vassasataṁ, devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ eso eko rattindivo, tāya rattiyā tiṁsarattiyo māso, tena māsena dvādasamāsiyo saṁvaccharo, tena saṁvaccharena dibbaṁ vassasahassaṁ devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ āyuppamāṇaṁ.

     A hundred human years are equivalent to one day and night for the gods of the thirty-three. Thirty such days make a month, and twelve months make a year. The gods of the thirty-three have a lifespan of a thousand such years.

174. 174

     येye तेte मित्तामच्चाmit·tā·mac·cā ञातिसालोहिताñā·ti·sā·lo·hi·tā पाणातिपाताpā·ṇā·ti·pā·tā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā अदिन्नादानाa·din·nā·dā·nā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā कामेसुमिच्छाचाराkā·me·su·mic·chā·cā·rā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā मुसावादाmu·sā·vā·dā पटिविरताpa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā सुरामेरयमज्जपमादट्ठानाsu·rā·me·ra·ya·maj·ja·pa·mā·daṭ·ṭhā·nā पटिविरता,pa·ṭi·vi·ra·tā तेte कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ सग्गंsag·gaṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ उपपन्नाu·pa·pan·nā देवानंde·vā·naṃ तावतिंसानंtā·va·tiṃ·sā·naṃ सहब्यतं।sa·hab·ya·taṃ

     Ye te mittāmaccā ñātisālohitā pāṇātipātā paṭiviratā adinnādānā paṭiviratā kāmesumicchācārā paṭiviratā musāvādā paṭiviratā surāmerayamajjapamādaṭṭhānā paṭiviratā, te kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapannā devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyataṁ.

     Now, as to your friends who are reborn in the company of the gods of the thirty-three after doing good things.

175. 175

     सचेsa·ce पनpa·na तेसंte·saṃ एवंe·vaṃ भविस्सति:bha·vis·sa·ti

     Sace pana tesaṁ evaṁ bhavissati:

     If they think,

176. 176

     ‘यावyā·va मयंma·yaṃ द्वेdve वाvā तीणिtī·ṇi वाvā रत्तिन्दिवाrat·tin·di·vā दिब्बेहिdib·be·hi पञ्चहिpañ·ca·hi कामगुणेहिkā·ma·gu·ṇe·hi समप्पिताsa·map·pi·tā समङ्गीभूताsa·maṅ·gī·bhū·tā परिचारेम,pa·ri·cā·re·ma अथa·tha मयंma·yaṃ पायासिस्सpā·yā·sis·sa राजञ्ञस्सrā·jañ·ñas·sa गन्त्वाgan·tvā आरोचेय्याम:ā·ro·cey·yā·ma

     ‘yāva mayaṁ dve vā tīṇi vā rattindivā dibbehi pañcahi kāmaguṇehi samappitā samaṅgībhūtā paricārema, atha mayaṁ pāyāsissa rājaññassa gantvā āroceyyāma:

     ‘First I’ll amuse myself for two or three days, supplied and provided with the five kinds of heavenly sensual stimulation. Then I’ll go back to Pāyāsi and tell him that

177. 177

     “इतिपिi·ti·pi अत्थिat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko अत्थिat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā अत्थिat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको”ति।vi·pā·ko

     “itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko”ti.

     there is an afterlife.’

178. 178

     अपिa·pi नुnu तेte आगन्त्वाā·gan·tvā आरोचेय्युं—ā·ro·cey·yuṃ

     Api nu te āgantvā āroceyyuṁ—

     Would they come back to tell you that

179. 179

     इतिपिi·ti·pi अत्थिat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko अत्थिat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā अत्थिat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति?vi·pā·ko

     itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti?

     there is an afterlife?”

180. 180

     “नोno हिदं,hi·daṃ भोbho कस्सप।kas·sa·pa

     “No hidaṁ, bho kassapa.

     “No, worthy Kassapa.

181. 181

     अपिa·pi हिhi मयं,ma·yaṃ भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa चिरंci·raṃ कालङ्कतापिkā·laṅ·ka·tā·pi भवेय्याम।bha·vey·yā·ma

     Api hi mayaṁ, bho kassapa, ciraṁ kālaṅkatāpi bhaveyyāma.

     For I would be long dead by then.

182. 182

     कोko पनेतंpa·ne·taṃ भोतोbho·to कस्सपस्सkas·sa·pas·sa आरोचेति:ā·ro·ce·ti

     Ko panetaṁ bhoto kassapassa āroceti:

     But worthy Kassapa, who has told you

183. 183

     ‘अत्थिat·thi देवाde·vā तावतिंसा’तिtā·va·tiṃ·sā वाvā ‘एवंदीघायुकाe·vaṃ·dī·ghā·yu·kā देवाde·vā तावतिंसा’तिtā·va·tiṃ·sā वा।vā

     ‘atthi devā tāvatiṁsā’ti vā ‘evaṁdīghāyukā devā tāvatiṁsā’ti vā.

     that the gods of the thirty-three exist, or that they have such a long lifespan?

184. 184

     नna मयंma·yaṃ भोतोbho·to कस्सपस्सkas·sa·pas·sa सद्दहाम:sad·da·hā·ma

     Na mayaṁ bhoto kassapassa saddahāma:

     I don’t believe you.”

185. 185

     ‘अत्थिat·thi देवाde·vā तावतिंसा’तिtā·va·tiṃ·sā वाvā ‘एवंदीघायुकाe·vaṃ·dī·ghā·yu·kā देवाde·vā तावतिंसा’तिtā·va·tiṃ·sā वा”ति।vā

     ‘atthi devā tāvatiṁsā’ti vā ‘evaṁdīghāyukā devā tāvatiṁsā’ti vā”ti.

     (Pāli only)

186. 186

     2।5। जच्चन्धउपमाjac·can·dha·u·pa·mā

     2.5. Jaccandhaupamā

     2.5. Blind From Birth

187. 187

     “सेय्यथापि,sey·ya·thā·pi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña जच्चन्धोjac·can·dho पुरिसोpu·ri·so नna पस्सेय्यpas·sey·ya कण्ह—सुक्कानिkaṇ·ha रूपानि,rū·pā·ni नna पस्सेय्यpas·sey·ya नीलकानिnī·la·kā·ni रूपानि,rū·pā·ni नna पस्सेय्यpas·sey·ya पीतकानिpī·ta·kā·ni रूपानि,rū·pā·ni नna पस्सेय्यpas·sey·ya लोहितकानिlo·hi·ta·kā·ni रूपानि,rū·pā·ni नna पस्सेय्यpas·sey·ya मञ्जिट्ठकानिmañ·jiṭ·ṭha·kā·ni रूपानि,rū·pā·ni नna पस्सेय्यpas·sey·ya समविसमं,sa·ma·vi·sa·maṃ नna पस्सेय्यpas·sey·ya तारकानिtā·ra·kā·ni रूपानि,rū·pā·ni नna पस्सेय्यpas·sey·ya चन्दिमसूरिये।can·di·ma·sū·ri·ye

     “Seyyathāpi, rājañña, jaccandho puriso na passeyya kaṇha—sukkāni rūpāni, na passeyya nīlakāni rūpāni, na passeyya pītakāni rūpāni, na passeyya lohitakāni rūpāni, na passeyya mañjiṭṭhakāni rūpāni, na passeyya samavisamaṁ, na passeyya tārakāni rūpāni, na passeyya candimasūriye.

     “Chieftain, suppose there was a person blind from birth. They couldn’t see sights that are dark or bright, or blue, yellow, red, or magenta. They couldn’t see even and uneven ground, or the stars, or the moon and sun.

188. 188

     सोso एवंe·vaṃ वदेय्य:va·dey·ya

     So evaṁ vadeyya:

     They’d say,

189. 189

     ‘नत्थिnat·thi कण्हसुक्कानिkaṇ·ha·suk·kā·ni रूपानि,rū·pā·ni नत्थिnat·thi कण्हसुक्कानंkaṇ·ha·suk·kā·naṃ रूपानंrū·pā·naṃ दस्सावी।das·sā·vī

     ‘natthi kaṇhasukkāni rūpāni, natthi kaṇhasukkānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī.

     ‘There’s no such thing as dark and bright sights, and no one who sees them.

190. 190

     नत्थिnat·thi नीलकानिnī·la·kā·ni रूपानि,rū·pā·ni नत्थिnat·thi नीलकानंnī·la·kā·naṃ रूपानंrū·pā·naṃ दस्सावी।das·sā·vī

     Natthi nīlakāni rūpāni, natthi nīlakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī.

     There’s no such thing as blue,

191. 191

     नत्थिnat·thi पीतकानिpī·ta·kā·ni रूपानि,rū·pā·ni नत्थिnat·thi पीतकानंpī·ta·kā·naṃ रूपानंrū·pā·naṃ दस्सावी।das·sā·vī

     Natthi pītakāni rūpāni, natthi pītakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī.

     yellow,

192. 192

     नत्थिnat·thi लोहितकानिlo·hi·ta·kā·ni रूपानि,rū·pā·ni नत्थिnat·thi लोहितकानंlo·hi·ta·kā·naṃ रूपानंrū·pā·naṃ दस्सावी।das·sā·vī

     Natthi lohitakāni rūpāni, natthi lohitakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī.

     red,

193. 193

     नत्थिnat·thi मञ्जिट्ठकानिmañ·jiṭ·ṭha·kā·ni रूपानि,rū·pā·ni नत्थिnat·thi मञ्जिट्ठकानंmañ·jiṭ·ṭha·kā·naṃ रूपानंrū·pā·naṃ दस्सावी।das·sā·vī

     Natthi mañjiṭṭhakāni rūpāni, natthi mañjiṭṭhakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī.

     magenta,

194. 194

     नत्थिnat·thi समविसमं,sa·ma·vi·sa·maṃ नत्थिnat·thi समविसमस्सsa·ma·vi·sa·mas·sa दस्सावी।das·sā·vī

     Natthi samavisamaṁ, natthi samavisamassa dassāvī.

     even and uneven ground,

195. 195

     नत्थिnat·thi तारकानिtā·ra·kā·ni रूपानि,rū·pā·ni नत्थिnat·thi तारकानंtā·ra·kā·naṃ रूपानंrū·pā·naṃ दस्सावी।das·sā·vī

     Natthi tārakāni rūpāni, natthi tārakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī.

     stars,

196. 196

     नत्थिnat·thi चन्दिमसूरिया,can·di·ma·sū·ri·yā नत्थिnat·thi चन्दिमसूरियानंcan·di·ma·sū·ri·yā·naṃ दस्सावी।das·sā·vī

     Natthi candimasūriyā, natthi candimasūriyānaṁ dassāvī.

     moon and sun, and no one who sees these things.

197. 197

     अहमेतंa·ha·me·taṃ नna जानामि,jā·nā·mi अहमेतंa·ha·me·taṃ नna पस्सामि,pas·sā·mi तस्माtas·mā तंtaṃ नत्थी’ति।nat·thī

     Ahametaṁ na jānāmi, ahametaṁ na passāmi, tasmā taṁ natthī’ti.

     I don’t know it or see it, therefore it doesn’t exist.’

198. 198

     सम्माsam·mā नुnu खोkho सो,so राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्या”ति?va·dey·yā

     Sammā nu kho so, rājañña, vadamāno vadeyyā”ti?

     Would they be speaking rightly?”

199. 199

     “नोno हिदं,hi·daṃ भोbho कस्सप।kas·sa·pa

     “No hidaṁ, bho kassapa.

     “No, worthy Kassapa.

200. 200

     अत्थिat·thi कण्हसुक्कानिkaṇ·ha·suk·kā·ni रूपानि,rū·pā·ni अत्थिat·thi कण्हसुक्कानंkaṇ·ha·suk·kā·naṃ रूपानंrū·pā·naṃ दस्सावी।das·sā·vī

     Atthi kaṇhasukkāni rūpāni, atthi kaṇhasukkānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī.

     There are such things as dark and bright sights, and one who sees them.

201. 201

     अत्थिat·thi नीलकानिnī·la·kā·ni रूपानि,rū·pā·ni अत्थिat·thi नीलकानंnī·la·kā·naṃ रूपानंrū·pā·naṃ दस्सावीdas·sā·vī …पे…pe

     Atthi nīlakāni rūpāni, atthi nīlakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī …pe…

     And those other things are real, too, as is the one who sees them.

202. 202

     अत्थिat·thi समविसमं,sa·ma·vi·sa·maṃ अत्थिat·thi समविसमस्सsa·ma·vi·sa·mas·sa दस्सावी।das·sā·vī

     atthi samavisamaṁ, atthi samavisamassa dassāvī.

     (Pāli only)

203. 203

     अत्थिat·thi तारकानिtā·ra·kā·ni रूपानि,rū·pā·ni अत्थिat·thi तारकानंtā·ra·kā·naṃ रूपानंrū·pā·naṃ दस्सावी।das·sā·vī

     Atthi tārakāni rūpāni, atthi tārakānaṁ rūpānaṁ dassāvī.

     (Pāli only)

204. 204

     अत्थिat·thi चन्दिमसूरिया,can·di·ma·sū·ri·yā अत्थिat·thi चन्दिमसूरियानंcan·di·ma·sū·ri·yā·naṃ दस्सावी।das·sā·vī

     Atthi candimasūriyā, atthi candimasūriyānaṁ dassāvī.

     So it’s not right to say this:

205. 205

     ‘अहमेतंa·ha·me·taṃ नna जानामि,jā·nā·mi अहमेतंa·ha·me·taṃ नna पस्सामि,pas·sā·mi तस्माtas·mā तंtaṃ नत्थी’ति।nat·thī

     ‘Ahametaṁ na jānāmi, ahametaṁ na passāmi, tasmā taṁ natthī’ti.

     ‘I don’t know it or see it, therefore it doesn’t exist.’”

206. 206

     नna हिhi सो,so भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa सम्माsam·mā वदमानोva·da·mā·no वदेय्या”ति।va·dey·yā

     Na hi so, bho kassapa, sammā vadamāno vadeyyā”ti.

     (Pāli only)

207. 207

     “एवमेवe·va·me·va खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña जच्चन्धूपमोjac·can·dhū·pa·mo मञ्ञेmañ·ñe पटिभासिpa·ṭi·bhā·si यंyaṃ मंmaṃ त्वंtvaṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदेसि।va·de·si

     “Evameva kho tvaṁ, rājañña, jaccandhūpamo maññe paṭibhāsi yaṁ maṁ tvaṁ evaṁ vadesi.

     “In the same way, chieftain, when you tell me you don’t believe me you seem like the blind man in the simile.

208. 208

     कोko पनेतंpa·ne·taṃ भोतोbho·to कस्सपस्सkas·sa·pas·sa आरोचेति:ā·ro·ce·ti

     Ko panetaṁ bhoto kassapassa āroceti:

     (Pāli only)

209. 209

     ‘अत्थिat·thi देवाde·vā तावतिंसा’तिtā·va·tiṃ·sā वा,vā ‘एवंदीघायुकाe·vaṃ·dī·ghā·yu·kā देवाde·vā तावतिंसा’तिtā·va·tiṃ·sā वा?vā

     ‘atthi devā tāvatiṁsā’ti vā, ‘evaṁdīghāyukā devā tāvatiṁsā’ti vā?

     (Pāli only)

210. 210

     नna मयंma·yaṃ भोतोbho·to कस्सपस्सkas·sa·pas·sa सद्दहाम:sad·da·hā·ma

     Na mayaṁ bhoto kassapassa saddahāma:

     (Pāli only)

211. 211

     ‘अत्थिat·thi देवाde·vā तावतिंसा’तिtā·va·tiṃ·sā वाvā ‘एवंदीघायुकाe·vaṃ·dī·ghā·yu·kā देवाde·vā तावतिंसा’तिtā·va·tiṃ·sā वा”ति।vā

     ‘atthi devā tāvatiṁsā’ti vā ‘evaṁdīghāyukā devā tāvatiṁsā’ti vā”ti.

     (Pāli only)

212. 212

     “नna खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña एवंe·vaṃ परोpa·ro लोकोlo·ko दट्ठब्बो,daṭ·ṭhab·bo यथाya·thā त्वंtvaṃ मञ्ञसिmañ·ña·si इमिनाi·mi·nā मंसचक्खुना।maṃ·sa·cak·khu·nā

     “Na kho, rājañña, evaṁ paro loko daṭṭhabbo, yathā tvaṁ maññasi iminā maṁsacakkhunā.

     You can’t see the other world the way you think, with the eye of the flesh.

213. 213

     येye खोkho ते,te राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña समणब्राह्मणाsa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇā अरञ्ञवनपत्थानिa·rañ·ña·va·na·pat·thā·ni पन्तानिpan·tā·ni सेनासनानिse·nā·sa·nā·ni पटिसेवन्ति,pa·ṭi·se·van·ti तेte तत्थtat·tha अप्पमत्ताap·pa·mat·tā आतापिनोā·tā·pi·no पहितत्ताpa·hi·tat·tā विहरन्ताvi·ha·ran·tā दिब्बचक्खुंdib·ba·cak·khuṃ विसोधेन्ति।vi·so·dhen·ti

     Ye kho te, rājañña, samaṇabrāhmaṇā araññavanapatthāni pantāni senāsanāni paṭisevanti, te tattha appamattā ātāpino pahitattā viharantā dibbacakkhuṁ visodhenti.

     There are ascetics and brahmins who live in the wilderness, frequenting remote lodgings in the wilderness and the forest. Meditating diligent, keen, and resolute, they purify the heavenly eye, the power of clairvoyance.

214. 214

     तेte दिब्बेनdib·be·na चक्खुनाcak·khu·nā विसुद्धेनvi·sud·dhe·na अतिक्कन्तमानुसकेनa·tik·kan·ta·mā·nu·sa·ke·na इमञ्चेवi·mañ·ce·va लोकंlo·kaṃ पस्सन्तिpas·san·ti परञ्चpa·rañ·ca सत्तेsat·te चca ओपपातिके।o·pa·pā·ti·ke

     Te dibbena cakkhunā visuddhena atikkantamānusakena imañceva lokaṁ passanti parañca satte ca opapātike.

     With clairvoyance that is purified and superhuman, they see this world and the other world, and sentient beings who are spontaneously reborn.

215. 215

     एवञ्चe·vañ·ca खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña परोpa·ro लोकोlo·ko दट्ठब्बो;daṭ·ṭhab·bo

     Evañca kho, rājañña, paro loko daṭṭhabbo;

     That’s how to see the other world,

216. 216

     नna त्वेवtve·va यथाya·thā त्वंtvaṃ मञ्ञसिmañ·ña·si इमिनाi·mi·nā मंसचक्खुना।maṃ·sa·cak·khu·nā

     na tveva yathā tvaṁ maññasi iminā maṁsacakkhunā.

     not how you think, with the eye of the flesh.

217. 217

     इमिनापिi·mi·nā·pi खोkho ते,te राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होतु:ho·tu

     Imināpi kho te, rājañña, pariyāyena evaṁ hotu:

     By this method, too, it ought to be proven that

218. 218

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi अत्थिat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko अत्थिat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā अत्थिat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is an afterlife.”

219. 219

     “किञ्चापिkiñ·cā·pi भवंbha·vaṃ कस्सपोkas·sa·po एवमाह,e·va·mā·ha अथa·tha खोkho एवंe·vaṃ मेme एत्थet·tha होति:ho·ti

     “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho evaṁ me ettha hoti:

     “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I think that

220. 220

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is no afterlife.”

221. 221

     “अत्थिat·thi पन,pa·na राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo …पे…pe

     “Atthi pana, rājañña, pariyāyo …pe…

     “Can you prove it?”

222. 222

     अत्थि,at·thi भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo …पे…pe

     atthi, bho kassapa, pariyāyo …pe…

     “I can.”

223. 223

     यथाya·thā कथंka·thaṃ विय,vi·ya राजञ्ञा”ति?rā·jañ·ñā

     yathā kathaṁ viya, rājaññā”ti?

     “How, exactly, chieftain?”

224. 224

     “इधाहं,i·dhā·haṃ भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa पस्सामिpas·sā·mi समणब्राह्मणेsa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇe सीलवन्तेsī·la·van·te कल्याणधम्मेkal·yā·ṇa·dham·me जीवितुकामेjī·vi·tu·kā·me अमरितुकामेa·ma·ri·tu·kā·me सुखकामेsu·kha·kā·me दुक्खपटिकूले।duk·kha·pa·ṭi·kū·le

     “Idhāhaṁ, bho kassapa, passāmi samaṇabrāhmaṇe sīlavante kalyāṇadhamme jīvitukāme amaritukāme sukhakāme dukkhapaṭikūle.

     “Well, I see ascetics and brahmins who are ethical, of good character, who want to live and don’t want to die, who want to be happy and recoil from pain.

225. 225

     तस्सtas·sa मय्हं,may·haṃ भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa एवंe·vaṃ होति—ho·ti

     Tassa mayhaṁ, bho kassapa, evaṁ hoti—

     I think to myself,

226. 226

     सचेsa·ce खोkho इमेi·me भोन्तोbhon·to समणब्राह्मणाsa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇā सीलवन्तोsī·la·van·to कल्याणधम्माkal·yā·ṇa·dham·mā एवंe·vaṃ जानेय्युं:jā·ney·yuṃ

     sace kho ime bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā evaṁ jāneyyuṁ:

     ‘If those ascetics and brahmins knew that

227. 227

     ‘इतोi·to नोno मतानंma·tā·naṃ सेय्योsey·yo भविस्सती’ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

     ‘ito no matānaṁ seyyo bhavissatī’ti.

     things were going to be better for them after death,

228. 228

     इदानिमेi·dā·ni·me भोन्तोbhon·to समणब्राह्मणाsa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇā सीलवन्तोsī·la·van·to कल्याणधम्माkal·yā·ṇa·dham·mā विसंvi·saṃ वाvā खादेय्युं,khā·dey·yuṃ सत्थंsat·thaṃ वाvā आहरेय्युं,ā·ha·rey·yuṃ उब्बन्धित्वाub·ban·dhit·vā वाvā कालंkā·laṃ करेय्युं,ka·rey·yuṃ पपातेpa·pā·te वाvā पपतेय्युं।pa·pa·tey·yuṃ

     Idānime bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā visaṁ vā khādeyyuṁ, satthaṁ vā āhareyyuṁ, ubbandhitvā vā kālaṁ kareyyuṁ, papāte vā papateyyuṁ.

     they’d drink poison, take their lives, hang themselves, or throw themselves off a cliff.

229. 229

     यस्माyas·mā चca खोkho इमेi·me भोन्तोbhon·to समणब्राह्मणाsa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇā सीलवन्तोsī·la·van·to कल्याणधम्माkal·yā·ṇa·dham·mā नna एवंe·vaṃ जानन्ति:jā·nan·ti

     Yasmā ca kho ime bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā na evaṁ jānanti:

     They mustn’t know that

230. 230

     ‘इतोi·to नोno मतानंma·tā·naṃ सेय्योsey·yo भविस्सती’ति,bha·vis·sa·tī तस्माtas·mā इमेi·me भोन्तोbhon·to समणब्राह्मणाsa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇā सीलवन्तोsī·la·van·to कल्याणधम्माkal·yā·ṇa·dham·mā जीवितुकामाjī·vi·tu·kā·mā अमरितुकामाa·ma·ri·tu·kā·mā सुखकामाsu·kha·kā·mā दुक्खपटिकूलाduk·kha·pa·ṭi·kū·lā अत्तानंat·tā·naṃ नna मारेन्ति।mā·ren·ti

     ‘ito no matānaṁ seyyo bhavissatī’ti, tasmā ime bhonto samaṇabrāhmaṇā sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā jīvitukāmā amaritukāmā sukhakāmā dukkhapaṭikūlā attānaṁ na mārenti.

     things are going to be better for them after death. That’s why they are ethical, of good character, wanting to live and not wanting to die, wanting to be happy and recoiling from pain.’

231. 231

     अयम्पिa·yam·pi खो,kho भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मेme परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Ayampi kho, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti:

     This is the method by which I prove that

232. 232

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is no afterlife.”

233. 233

     2।6। गब्भिनीउपमाgab·bhi·nī·u·pa·mā

     2.6. Gabbhinīupamā

     2.6. The Simile of the Pregnant Woman

234. 234

     “तेनte·na हि,hi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña उपमंu·pa·maṃ तेte करिस्सामि।ka·ris·sā·mi

     “Tena hi, rājañña, upamaṁ te karissāmi.

     “Well then, chieftain, I shall give you a simile.

235. 235

     उपमायu·pa·mā·ya म्’इधेकच्चेm विञ्ञूviñ·ñū पुरिसाpu·ri·sā भासितस्सbhā·si·tas·sa अत्थंat·thaṃ आजानन्ति।ā·jā·nan·ti

     Upamāya m’idhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti.

     For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said.

236. 236

     भूतपुब्बं,bhū·ta·pub·baṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña अञ्ञतरस्सañ·ña·ta·ras·sa ब्राह्मणस्सbrāh·ma·ṇas·sa द्वेdve पजापतियोpa·jā·pa·ti·yo अहेसुं।a·he·suṃ

     Bhūtapubbaṁ, rājañña, aññatarassa brāhmaṇassa dve pajāpatiyo ahesuṁ.

     Once upon a time, a certain brahmin had two wives.

237. 237

     एकिस्साe·kis·sā पुत्तोput·to अहोसिa·ho·si दसवस्सुद्देसिकोda·sa·vas·sud·de·si·ko वाvā द्वादसवस्सुद्देसिकोdvā·da·sa·vas·sud·de·si·ko वा,vā एकाe·kā गब्भिनीgab·bhi·nī उपविजञ्ञा।u·pa·vi·jañ·ñā

     Ekissā putto ahosi dasavassuddesiko vā dvādasavassuddesiko vā, ekā gabbhinī upavijaññā.

     One had a son ten or twelve years of age, while the other was pregnant and about to give birth.

238. 238

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso ब्राह्मणोbrāh·ma·ṇo कालमकासि।kā·la·ma·kā·si

     Atha kho so brāhmaṇo kālamakāsi.

     Then the brahmin passed away.

239. 239

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso माणवकोmā·ṇa·va·ko मातुसपत्तिंmā·tu·sa·pat·tiṃ एतदवोच:e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho so māṇavako mātusapattiṁ etadavoca:

     So the youth said to his mother’s co-wife,

240. 240

     ‘यमिदं,ya·mi·daṃ भोति,bho·ti धनंdha·naṃ वाvā धञ्ञंdhañ·ñaṃ वाvā रजतंra·ja·taṃ वाvā जातरूपंjā·ta·rū·paṃ वा,vā सब्बंsab·baṃ तंtaṃ मय्हं;may·haṃ

     ‘yamidaṁ, bhoti, dhanaṁ vā dhaññaṁ vā rajataṁ vā jātarūpaṁ vā, sabbaṁ taṁ mayhaṁ;

     ‘Madam, all the money, grain, silver, and gold is mine,

241. 241

     नत्थिnat·thi तुय्हेत्थtuy·het·tha किञ्चि।kiñ·ci

     natthi tuyhettha kiñci.

     and you get nothing.

242. 242

     पितुpi·tu मे,me भोति,bho·ti दायज्जंdā·yaj·jaṃ निय्यादेही’ति।niy·yā·de·hī

     Pitu me, bhoti, dāyajjaṁ niyyādehī’ti.

     Transfer to me my father’s inheritance.’

243. 243

     एवंe·vaṃ वुत्ते,vut·te साsā ब्राह्मणीbrāh·ma·ṇī तंtaṃ माणवकंmā·ṇa·va·kaṃ एतदवोच:e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Evaṁ vutte, sā brāhmaṇī taṁ māṇavakaṁ etadavoca:

     But the brahmin lady said,

244. 244

     ‘आगमेहिā·ga·me·hi ताव,tā·va तात,tā·ta यावyā·va विजायामि।vi·jā·yā·mi

     ‘āgamehi tāva, tāta, yāva vijāyāmi.

     ‘Wait, my dear, until I give birth.

245. 245

     सचेsa·ce कुमारकोku·mā·ra·ko भविस्सति,bha·vis·sa·ti तस्सपिtas·sa·pi एकदेसोe·ka·de·so भविस्सति;bha·vis·sa·ti

     Sace kumārako bhavissati, tassapi ekadeso bhavissati;

     If it’s a boy, one portion shall be his.

246. 246

     सचेsa·ce कुमारिकाku·mā·ri·kā भविस्सति,bha·vis·sa·ti सापिsā·pi तेte ओपभोग्गाo·pa·bhog·gā भविस्सती’ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

     sace kumārikā bhavissati, sāpi te opabhoggā bhavissatī’ti.

     If it’s a girl, she will be your reward.’

247. 247

     दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho सोso माणवकोmā·ṇa·va·ko मातुसपत्तिंmā·tu·sa·pat·tiṃ एतदवोच:e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Dutiyampi kho so māṇavako mātusapattiṁ etadavoca:

     But for a second time,

248. 248

     ‘यमिदं,ya·mi·daṃ भोति,bho·ti धनंdha·naṃ वाvā धञ्ञंdhañ·ñaṃ वाvā रजतंra·ja·taṃ वाvā जातरूपंjā·ta·rū·paṃ वा,vā सब्बंsab·baṃ तंtaṃ मय्हं;may·haṃ

     ‘yamidaṁ, bhoti, dhanaṁ vā dhaññaṁ vā rajataṁ vā jātarūpaṁ vā, sabbaṁ taṁ mayhaṁ;

     (Pāli only)

249. 249

     नत्थिnat·thi तुय्हेत्थtuy·het·tha किञ्चि।kiñ·ci

     natthi tuyhettha kiñci.

     (Pāli only)

250. 250

     पितुpi·tu मे,me भोति,bho·ti दायज्जंdā·yaj·jaṃ निय्यादेही’ति।niy·yā·de·hī

     Pitu me, bhoti, dāyajjaṁ niyyādehī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

251. 251

     दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho साsā ब्राह्मणीbrāh·ma·ṇī तंtaṃ माणवकंmā·ṇa·va·kaṃ एतदवोच:e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Dutiyampi kho sā brāhmaṇī taṁ māṇavakaṁ etadavoca:

     (Pāli only)

252. 252

     ‘आगमेहिā·ga·me·hi ताव,tā·va तात,tā·ta यावyā·va विजायामि।vi·jā·yā·mi

     ‘āgamehi tāva, tāta, yāva vijāyāmi.

     (Pāli only)

253. 253

     सचेsa·ce कुमारकोku·mā·ra·ko भविस्सति,bha·vis·sa·ti तस्सपिtas·sa·pi एकदेसोe·ka·de·so भविस्सति;bha·vis·sa·ti

     Sace kumārako bhavissati, tassapi ekadeso bhavissati;

     (Pāli only)

254. 254

     सचेsa·ce कुमारिकाku·mā·ri·kā भविस्सतिbha·vis·sa·ti सापिsā·pi तेte ओपभोग्गाo·pa·bhog·gā भविस्सती’ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

     sace kumārikā bhavissati sāpi te opabhoggā bhavissatī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

255. 255

     ततियम्पिta·ti·yam·pi खोkho सोso माणवकोmā·ṇa·va·ko मातुसपत्तिंmā·tu·sa·pat·tiṃ एतदवोच:e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Tatiyampi kho so māṇavako mātusapattiṁ etadavoca:

     and a third time, the youth insisted that the entire inheritance must be his.

256. 256

     ‘यमिदं,ya·mi·daṃ भोति,bho·ti धनंdha·naṃ वाvā धञ्ञंdhañ·ñaṃ वाvā रजतंra·ja·taṃ वाvā जातरूपंjā·ta·rū·paṃ वा,vā सब्बंsab·baṃ तंtaṃ मय्हं;may·haṃ

     ‘yamidaṁ, bhoti, dhanaṁ vā dhaññaṁ vā rajataṁ vā jātarūpaṁ vā, sabbaṁ taṁ mayhaṁ;

     (Pāli only)

257. 257

     नत्थिnat·thi तुय्हेत्थtuy·het·tha किञ्चि।kiñ·ci

     natthi tuyhettha kiñci.

     (Pāli only)

258. 258

     पितुpi·tu मे,me भोति,bho·ti दायज्जंdā·yaj·jaṃ निय्यादेही’ति।niy·yā·de·hī

     Pitu me, bhoti, dāyajjaṁ niyyādehī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

259. 259

     अथa·tha खोkho साsā ब्राह्मणीbrāh·ma·ṇī सत्थंsat·thaṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā ओवरकंo·va·ra·kaṃ पविसित्वाpa·vi·sit·vā उदरंu·da·raṃ ओपादेसि:o·pā·de·si

     Atha kho sā brāhmaṇī satthaṁ gahetvā ovarakaṁ pavisitvā udaraṁ opādesi:

     So the brahmin lady took a knife, went to her bedroom, and sliced open her belly, thinking,

260. 260

     ‘यावyā·va विजायामिvi·jā·yā·mi यदिya·di वाvā कुमारकोku·mā·ra·ko यदिya·di वाvā कुमारिका’ति।ku·mā·ri·kā

     ‘yāva vijāyāmi yadi vā kumārako yadi vā kumārikā’ti.

     ‘Until I give birth—whether it’s a boy or a girl!’

261. 261

     साsā अत्तानञ्चेवat·tā·nañ·ce·va जीवितञ्चjī·vi·tañ·ca गब्भञ्चgab·bhañ·ca सापतेय्यञ्चsā·pa·tey·yañ·ca विनासेसि।vi·nā·se·si

     Sā attānañceva jīvitañca gabbhañca sāpateyyañca vināsesi.

     She destroyed her own life and that of the fetus, as well as any wealth.

262. 262

     यथाya·thā तंtaṃ बालाbā·lā अब्यत्ताab·yat·tā अनयब्यसनंa·na·yab·ya·sa·naṃ आपन्नाā·pan·nā अयोनिसोa·yo·ni·so दायज्जंdā·yaj·jaṃ गवेसन्ती,ga·ve·san·tī एवमेवe·va·me·va खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña बालोbā·lo अब्यत्तोab·yat·to अनयब्यसनंa·na·yab·ya·sa·naṃ आपज्जिस्ससिā·paj·jis·sa·si अयोनिसोa·yo·ni·so परलोकंpa·ra·lo·kaṃ गवेसन्तो;ga·ve·san·to

     Yathā taṁ bālā abyattā anayabyasanaṁ āpannā ayoniso dāyajjaṁ gavesantī, evameva kho tvaṁ, rājañña, bālo abyatto anayabyasanaṁ āpajjissasi ayoniso paralokaṁ gavesanto;

     Being foolish and incompetent, she sought an inheritance irrationally and fell to ruin and disaster. In the same way, chieftain, being foolish and incompetent, you’re seeking the other world irrationally and will fall to ruin and disaster,

263. 263

     सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi साsā ब्राह्मणीbrāh·ma·ṇī बालाbā·lā अब्यत्ताab·yat·tā अनयब्यसनंa·na·yab·ya·sa·naṃ आपन्नाā·pan·nā अयोनिसोa·yo·ni·so दायज्जंdā·yaj·jaṃ गवेसन्ती।ga·ve·san·tī

     seyyathāpi sā brāhmaṇī bālā abyattā anayabyasanaṁ āpannā ayoniso dāyajjaṁ gavesantī.

     just like that brahmin lady.

264. 264

     नna खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña समणब्राह्मणाsa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇā सीलवन्तोsī·la·van·to कल्याणधम्माkal·yā·ṇa·dham·mā अपक्कंa·pak·kaṃ परिपाचेन्ति;pa·ri·pā·cen·ti

     Na kho, rājañña, samaṇabrāhmaṇā sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā apakkaṁ paripācenti;

     Good ascetics and brahmins don’t force what is unripe to ripen;

265. 265

     अपिa·pi चca परिपाकंpa·ri·pā·kaṃ आगमेन्ति।ā·ga·men·ti

     api ca paripākaṁ āgamenti.

     rather, they wait for it to ripen.

266. 266

     पण्डितानंpaṇ·ḍi·tā·naṃ अत्थोat·tho हि,hi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña समणब्राह्मणानंsa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇā·naṃ सीलवन्तानंsī·la·van·tā·naṃ कल्याणधम्मानंkal·yā·ṇa·dham·mā·naṃ जीवितेन।jī·vi·te·na

     Paṇḍitānaṁ attho hi, rājañña, samaṇabrāhmaṇānaṁ sīlavantānaṁ kalyāṇadhammānaṁ jīvitena.

     For the life of astute ascetics and brahmins is beneficial.

267. 267

     यथाya·thā यथाya·thā खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña समणब्राह्मणाsa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇā सीलवन्तोsī·la·van·to कल्याणधम्माkal·yā·ṇa·dham·mā चिरंci·raṃ दीघमद्धानंdī·gha·mad·dhā·naṃ तिट्ठन्तिtiṭ·ṭhan·ti तथाta·thā तथाta·thā बहुंba·huṃ पुञ्ञंpuñ·ñaṃ पसवन्ति,pa·sa·van·ti बहुजनहितायba·hu·ja·na·hi·tā·ya चca पटिपज्जन्तिpa·ṭi·paj·jan·ti बहुजनसुखायba·hu·ja·na·su·khā·ya लोकानुकम्पायlo·kā·nu·kam·pā·ya अत्थायat·thā·ya हितायhi·tā·ya सुखायsu·khā·ya देवमनुस्सानं।de·va·ma·nus·sā·naṃ

     Yathā yathā kho, rājañña, samaṇabrāhmaṇā sīlavanto kalyāṇadhammā ciraṁ dīghamaddhānaṁ tiṭṭhanti tathā tathā bahuṁ puññaṁ pasavanti, bahujanahitāya ca paṭipajjanti bahujanasukhāya lokānukampāya atthāya hitāya sukhāya devamanussānaṁ.

     So long as they remain, good ascetics and brahmins brim with merit, and act for the welfare and happiness of the people, out of sympathy for the world, for the benefit, welfare, and happiness of gods and humans.

268. 268

     इमिनापिi·mi·nā·pi खोkho ते,te राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होतु:ho·tu

     Imināpi kho te, rājañña, pariyāyena evaṁ hotu:

     By this method, too, it ought to be proven that

269. 269

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi अत्थिat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko अत्थिat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā अत्थिat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is an afterlife.”

270. 270

     “किञ्चापिkiñ·cā·pi भवंbha·vaṃ कस्सपोkas·sa·po एवमाह,e·va·mā·ha अथa·tha खोkho एवंe·vaṃ मेme एत्थet·tha होति:ho·ti

     “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho evaṁ me ettha hoti:

     “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I think that

271. 271

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is no afterlife.”

272. 272

     “अत्थिat·thi पन,pa·na राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo …पे…pe

     “Atthi pana, rājañña, pariyāyo …pe…

     “Can you prove it?”

273. 273

     अत्थि,at·thi भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo …पे…pe

     atthi, bho kassapa, pariyāyo …pe…

     “I can.”

274. 274

     यथाya·thā कथंka·thaṃ विय,vi·ya राजञ्ञा”ति?rā·jañ·ñā

     yathā kathaṁ viya, rājaññā”ti?

     “How, exactly, chieftain?”

275. 275

     “इधi·dha मे,me भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa पुरिसाpu·ri·sā चोरंco·raṃ आगुचारिंā·gu·cā·riṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā दस्सेन्ति:das·sen·ti

     “Idha me, bho kassapa, purisā coraṁ āgucāriṁ gahetvā dassenti:

     “Suppose they were to arrest a bandit, a criminal and present him to me, saying,

276. 276

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ ते,te भन्ते,bhan·te चोरोco·ro आगुचारी;ā·gu·cā·rī

     ‘ayaṁ te, bhante, coro āgucārī;

     ‘Sir, this is a bandit, a criminal.

277. 277

     इमस्सi·mas·sa यंyaṃ इच्छसि,ic·cha·si तंtaṃ दण्डंdaṇ·ḍaṃ पणेही’ति।pa·ṇe·hī

     imassa yaṁ icchasi, taṁ daṇḍaṁ paṇehī’ti.

     Punish him as you will.’

278. 278

     त्याहंtyā·haṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदामि:va·dā·mi

     Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi:

     I say to them,

279. 279

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भो,bho इमंi·maṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ जीवन्तंयेवjī·van·taṃ·ye·va कुम्भियाkum·bhi·yā पक्खिपित्वाpak·khi·pit·vā मुखंmu·khaṃ पिदहित्वाpi·da·hit·vā अल्लेनal·le·na चम्मेनcam·me·na ओनन्धित्वाo·nan·dhit·vā अल्लायal·lā·ya मत्तिकायmat·ti·kā·ya बहलावलेपनंba·ha·lā·va·le·pa·naṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā उद्धनंud·dha·naṃ आरोपेत्वाā·ro·pet·vā अग्गिंag·giṃ देथा’ति।de·thā

     ‘tena hi, bho, imaṁ purisaṁ jīvantaṁyeva kumbhiyā pakkhipitvā mukhaṁ pidahitvā allena cammena onandhitvā allāya mattikāya bahalāvalepanaṁ karitvā uddhanaṁ āropetvā aggiṁ dethā’ti.

     ‘Well then, worthy sir, place this man in a pot while he’s still alive. Close up the mouth, bind it up with damp leather, and seal it with a thick coat of damp clay. Then lift it up on a stove and light the fire.’

280. 280

     तेte मेme ‘साधू’तिsā·dhū पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā तंtaṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ जीवन्तंयेवjī·van·taṃ·ye·va कुम्भियाkum·bhi·yā पक्खिपित्वाpak·khi·pit·vā मुखंmu·khaṃ पिदहित्वाpi·da·hit·vā अल्लेनal·le·na चम्मेनcam·me·na ओनन्धित्वाo·nan·dhit·vā अल्लायal·lā·ya मत्तिकायmat·ti·kā·ya बहलावलेपनंba·ha·lā·va·le·pa·naṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā उद्धनंud·dha·naṃ आरोपेत्वाā·ro·pet·vā अग्गिंag·giṃ देन्ति।den·ti

     Te me ‘sādhū’ti paṭissutvā taṁ purisaṁ jīvantaṁyeva kumbhiyā pakkhipitvā mukhaṁ pidahitvā allena cammena onandhitvā allāya mattikāya bahalāvalepanaṁ karitvā uddhanaṁ āropetvā aggiṁ denti.

     They agree, and do what I ask.

281. 281

     यदाya·dā मयंma·yaṃ जानामjā·nā·ma ‘कालङ्कतोkā·laṅ·ka·to सोso पुरिसो’ति,pu·ri·so अथa·tha नंnaṃ कुम्भिंkum·bhiṃ ओरोपेत्वाo·ro·pet·vā उब्भिन्दित्वाub·bhin·dit·vā मुखंmu·khaṃ विवरित्वाvi·va·rit·vā सणिकंsa·ṇi·kaṃ निल्लोकेम:nil·lo·ke·ma

     Yadā mayaṁ jānāma ‘kālaṅkato so puriso’ti, atha naṁ kumbhiṁ oropetvā ubbhinditvā mukhaṁ vivaritvā saṇikaṁ nillokema:

     When we know that that man has passed away, we lift down the pot and break it open, uncover the mouth, and slowly peek inside, thinking,

282. 282

     ‘अप्पेवap·pe·va नामस्सnā·mas·sa जीवंjī·vaṃ निक्खमन्तंnik·kha·man·taṃ पस्सेय्यामा’ति।pas·sey·yā·mā

     ‘appeva nāmassa jīvaṁ nikkhamantaṁ passeyyāmā’ti.

     ‘Hopefully we’ll see his soul escaping.’

283. 283

     नेवस्सne·vas·sa मयंma·yaṃ जीवंjī·vaṃ निक्खमन्तंnik·kha·man·taṃ पस्साम।pas·sā·ma

     Nevassa mayaṁ jīvaṁ nikkhamantaṁ passāma.

     But we don’t see his soul escaping.

284. 284

     अयम्पिa·yam·pi खो,kho भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मेme परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Ayampi kho, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti:

     This is how I prove that

285. 285

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is no afterlife.”

286. 286

     2।7। सुपिनकउपमाsu·pi·na·ka·u·pa·mā

     2.7. Supinakaupamā

     2.7. The Simile of the Dream

287. 287

     “तेनte·na हि,hi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña तञ्ञेवेत्थtañ·ñe·vet·tha पटिपुच्छिस्सामि,pa·ṭi·puc·chis·sā·mi यथाya·thā तेte खमेय्य,kha·mey·ya तथाta·thā नंnaṃ ब्याकरेय्यासि।byā·ka·rey·yā·si

     “Tena hi, rājañña, taññevettha paṭipucchissāmi, yathā te khameyya, tathā naṁ byākareyyāsi.

     “Well then, chieftain, I’ll ask you about this in return, and you can answer as you like.

288. 288

     अभिजानासिa·bhi·jā·nā·si नोno त्वं,tvaṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña दिवाdi·vā सेय्यंsey·yaṃ उपगतोu·pa·ga·to सुपिनकंsu·pi·na·kaṃ पस्सिताpas·si·tā आरामरामणेय्यकंā·rā·ma·rā·ma·ṇey·ya·kaṃ वनरामणेय्यकंva·na·rā·ma·ṇey·ya·kaṃ भूमिरामणेय्यकंbhū·mi·rā·ma·ṇey·ya·kaṃ पोक्खरणीरामणेय्यकन्”ति?pok·kha·ra·ṇī·rā·ma·ṇey·ya·kan

     Abhijānāsi no tvaṁ, rājañña, divā seyyaṁ upagato supinakaṁ passitā ārāmarāmaṇeyyakaṁ vanarāmaṇeyyakaṁ bhūmirāmaṇeyyakaṁ pokkharaṇīrāmaṇeyyakan”ti?

     Do you recall ever having a midday nap and seeing delightful parks, woods, meadows, and lotus ponds in a dream?”

289. 289

     “अभिजानामहं,a·bhi·jā·nā·ma·haṃ भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa दिवासेय्यंdi·vā·sey·yaṃ उपगतोu·pa·ga·to सुपिनकंsu·pi·na·kaṃ पस्सिताpas·si·tā आरामरामणेय्यकंā·rā·ma·rā·ma·ṇey·ya·kaṃ वनरामणेय्यकंva·na·rā·ma·ṇey·ya·kaṃ भूमिरामणेय्यकंbhū·mi·rā·ma·ṇey·ya·kaṃ पोक्खरणीरामणेय्यकन्”ति।pok·kha·ra·ṇī·rā·ma·ṇey·ya·kan

     “Abhijānāmahaṁ, bho kassapa, divāseyyaṁ upagato supinakaṁ passitā ārāmarāmaṇeyyakaṁ vanarāmaṇeyyakaṁ bhūmirāmaṇeyyakaṁ pokkharaṇīrāmaṇeyyakan”ti.

     “I do, worthy Kassapa.”

290. 290

     “रक्खन्तिrak·khan·ti तंtaṃ तम्हिtam·hi समयेsa·ma·ye खुज्जापिkhuj·jā·pi वामनकापिvā·ma·na·kā·pi वेलासिकापिve·lā·si·kā·pi कोमारिकापी”ति?ko·mā·ri·kā·pī

     “Rakkhanti taṁ tamhi samaye khujjāpi vāmanakāpi velāsikāpi komārikāpī”ti?

     “At that time were you guarded by hunchbacks, dwarves, coquettes, and maidens?”

291. 291

     “एवं,e·vaṃ भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa रक्खन्तिrak·khan·ti मंmaṃ तम्हिtam·hi समयेsa·ma·ye खुज्जापिkhuj·jā·pi वामनकापिvā·ma·na·kā·pi वेलासिकापिve·lā·si·kā·pi कोमारिकापी”ति।ko·mā·ri·kā·pī

     “Evaṁ, bho kassapa, rakkhanti maṁ tamhi samaye khujjāpi vāmanakāpi velāsikāpi komārikāpī”ti.

     “I was.”

292. 292

     “अपिa·pi नुnu ताtā तुय्हंtuy·haṃ जीवंjī·vaṃ पस्सन्तिpas·san·ti पविसन्तंpa·vi·san·taṃ वाvā निक्खमन्तंnik·kha·man·taṃ वा”ति?vā

     “Api nu tā tuyhaṁ jīvaṁ passanti pavisantaṁ vā nikkhamantaṁ vā”ti?

     “But did they see your soul entering or leaving?”

293. 293

     “नोno हिदं,hi·daṃ भोbho कस्सप”।kas·sa·pa

     “No hidaṁ, bho kassapa”.

     “No they did not.”

294. 294

     “ताtā हिhi नाम,nā·ma राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña तुय्हंtuy·haṃ जीवन्तस्सjī·van·tas·sa जीवन्तियोjī·van·ti·yo जीवंjī·vaṃ नna पस्सिस्सन्तिpas·sis·san·ti पविसन्तंpa·vi·san·taṃ वाvā निक्खमन्तंnik·kha·man·taṃ वा।vā

     “Tā hi nāma, rājañña, tuyhaṁ jīvantassa jīvantiyo jīvaṁ na passissanti pavisantaṁ vā nikkhamantaṁ vā.

     “So if they couldn’t even see your soul entering or leaving while you were still alive,

295. 295

     किंkiṃ पनpa·na त्वंtvaṃ कालङ्कतस्सkā·laṅ·ka·tas·sa जीवंjī·vaṃ पस्सिस्ससिpas·sis·sa·si पविसन्तंpa·vi·san·taṃ वाvā निक्खमन्तंnik·kha·man·taṃ वा।vā

     Kiṁ pana tvaṁ kālaṅkatassa jīvaṁ passissasi pavisantaṁ vā nikkhamantaṁ vā.

     how could you see the soul of a dead man?

296. 296

     इमिनापिi·mi·nā·pi खोkho ते,te राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होतु:ho·tu

     Imināpi kho te, rājañña, pariyāyena evaṁ hotu:

     By this method, too, it ought to be proven that

297. 297

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi अत्थिat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko अत्थिat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā अत्थिat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is an afterlife, there are beings reborn spontaneously, and there is a fruit or result of good and bad deeds.”

298. 298

     “किञ्चापिkiñ·cā·pi भवंbha·vaṃ कस्सपोkas·sa·po एवमाह,e·va·mā·ha अथa·tha खोkho एवंe·vaṃ मेme एत्थet·tha होति:ho·ti

     “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho evaṁ me ettha hoti:

     “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I think that

299. 299

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is no afterlife.”

300. 300

     “अत्थिat·thi पन,pa·na राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo …पे…pe

     “Atthi pana, rājañña, pariyāyo …pe…

     “Can you prove it?”

301. 301

     “अत्थि,at·thi भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo …पे…pe

     “atthi, bho kassapa, pariyāyo …pe…

     “I can.”

302. 302

     यथाya·thā कथंka·thaṃ विय,vi·ya राजञ्ञा”ति?rā·jañ·ñā

     yathā kathaṁ viya, rājaññā”ti?

     “How, exactly, chieftain?”

303. 303

     “इधi·dha मे,me भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa पुरिसाpu·ri·sā चोरंco·raṃ आगुचारिंā·gu·cā·riṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā दस्सेन्ति:das·sen·ti

     “Idha me, bho kassapa, purisā coraṁ āgucāriṁ gahetvā dassenti:

     “Suppose they were to arrest a bandit, a criminal and present him to me, saying,

304. 304

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ ते,te भन्ते,bhan·te चोरोco·ro आगुचारी;ā·gu·cā·rī

     ‘ayaṁ te, bhante, coro āgucārī;

     ‘Sir, this is a bandit, a criminal.

305. 305

     इमस्सi·mas·sa यंyaṃ इच्छसि,ic·cha·si तंtaṃ दण्डंdaṇ·ḍaṃ पणेही’ति।pa·ṇe·hī

     imassa yaṁ icchasi, taṁ daṇḍaṁ paṇehī’ti.

     Punish him as you will.’

306. 306

     त्याहंtyā·haṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदामि:va·dā·mi

     Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi:

     I say to them,

307. 307

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भो,bho इमंi·maṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ जीवन्तंयेवjī·van·taṃ·ye·va तुलायtu·lā·ya तुलेत्वाtu·let·vā जियायji·yā·ya अनस्सासकंa·nas·sā·sa·kaṃ मारेत्वाmā·ret·vā पुनदेवpu·na·de·va तुलायtu·lā·ya तुलेथा’ति।tu·le·thā

     ‘tena hi, bho, imaṁ purisaṁ jīvantaṁyeva tulāya tuletvā jiyāya anassāsakaṁ māretvā punadeva tulāya tulethā’ti.

     ‘Well then, worthy sir, weigh this man with scales while he’s still alive. Then strangle him with a bowstring, and when he’s dead, weigh him again.’

308. 308

     तेte मेme ‘साधू’तिsā·dhū पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā तंtaṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ जीवन्तंयेवjī·van·taṃ·ye·va तुलायtu·lā·ya तुलेत्वाtu·let·vā जियायji·yā·ya अनस्सासकंa·nas·sā·sa·kaṃ मारेत्वाmā·ret·vā पुनदेवpu·na·de·va तुलायtu·lā·ya तुलेन्ति।tu·len·ti

     Te me ‘sādhū’ti paṭissutvā taṁ purisaṁ jīvantaṁyeva tulāya tuletvā jiyāya anassāsakaṁ māretvā punadeva tulāya tulenti.

     They agree, and do what I ask.

309. 309

     यदाya·dā सोso जीवति,jī·va·ti तदाta·dā लहुतरोla·hu·ta·ro चca होतिho·ti मुदुतरोmu·du·ta·ro चca कम्मञ्ञतरोkam·mañ·ña·ta·ro च।ca

     Yadā so jīvati, tadā lahutaro ca hoti mudutaro ca kammaññataro ca.

     So long as they are alive, they’re lighter, softer, more flexible.

310. 310

     यदाya·dā पनpa·na सोso कालङ्कतोkā·laṅ·ka·to होतिho·ti तदाta·dā गरुतरोga·ru·ta·ro चca होतिho·ti पत्थिन्नतरोpat·thin·na·ta·ro चca अकम्मञ्ञतरोa·kam·mañ·ña·ta·ro च।ca

     Yadā pana so kālaṅkato hoti tadā garutaro ca hoti patthinnataro ca akammaññataro ca.

     But when they die they become heavier, stiffer, less flexible.

311. 311

     अयम्पिa·yam·pi खो,kho भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मेme परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Ayampi kho, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti:

     This is how I prove that

312. 312

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is no afterlife.”

313. 313

     2।8। सन्तत्तअयोगुळउपमाsan·tat·ta·a·yo·gu·ḷa·u·pa·mā

     2.8. Santattaayoguḷaupamā

     2.8. The Simile of the Hot Iron Ball

314. 314

     “तेनte·na हि,hi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña उपमंu·pa·maṃ तेte करिस्सामि।ka·ris·sā·mi

     “Tena hi, rājañña, upamaṁ te karissāmi.

     “Well then, chieftain, I shall give you a simile.

315. 315

     उपमायu·pa·mā·ya म्’इधेकच्चेm विञ्ञूviñ·ñū पुरिसाpu·ri·sā भासितस्सbhā·si·tas·sa अत्थंat·thaṃ आजानन्ति।ā·jā·nan·ti

     Upamāya m’idhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti.

     For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said.

316. 316

     सेय्यथापि,sey·ya·thā·pi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña पुरिसोpu·ri·so दिवसंdi·va·saṃ सन्तत्तंsan·tat·taṃ अयोगुळंa·yo·gu·ḷaṃ आदित्तंā·dit·taṃ सम्पज्जलितंsam·paj·ja·li·taṃ सजोतिभूतंsa·jo·ti·bhū·taṃ तुलायtu·lā·ya तुलेय्य।tu·ley·ya

     Seyyathāpi, rājañña, puriso divasaṁ santattaṁ ayoguḷaṁ ādittaṁ sampajjalitaṁ sajotibhūtaṁ tulāya tuleyya.

     Suppose a person was to heat an iron ball all day until it was burning, blazing, and glowing, and then they weigh it with scales.

317. 317

     तमेनंta·me·naṃ अपरेनa·pa·re·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na सीतंsī·taṃ निब्बुतंnib·bu·taṃ तुलायtu·lā·ya तुलेय्य।tu·ley·ya

     Tamenaṁ aparena samayena sītaṁ nibbutaṁ tulāya tuleyya.

     After some time, when it had cooled and become quenched, they’d weigh it again.

318. 318

     कदाka·dā नुnu खोkho सोso अयोगुळोa·yo·gu·ḷo लहुतरोla·hu·ta·ro वाvā होतिho·ti मुदुतरोmu·du·ta·ro वाvā कम्मञ्ञतरोkam·mañ·ña·ta·ro वा,vā यदाya·dā वाvā आदित्तोā·dit·to सम्पज्जलितोsam·paj·ja·li·to सजोतिभूतो,sa·jo·ti·bhū·to यदाya·dā वाvā सीतोsī·to निब्बुतो”ति?nib·bu·to

     Kadā nu kho so ayoguḷo lahutaro vā hoti mudutaro vā kammaññataro vā, yadā vā āditto sampajjalito sajotibhūto, yadā vā sīto nibbuto”ti?

     When would that iron ball be lighter, softer, and more workable—when it’s burning or when it’s cool?”

319. 319

     “यदाya·dā सो,so भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa अयोगुळोa·yo·gu·ḷo तेजोसहगतोte·jo·sa·ha·ga·to चca होतिho·ti वायोसहगतोvā·yo·sa·ha·ga·to चca आदित्तोā·dit·to सम्पज्जलितोsam·paj·ja·li·to सजोतिभूतो,sa·jo·ti·bhū·to तदाta·dā लहुतरोla·hu·ta·ro चca होतिho·ti मुदुतरोmu·du·ta·ro चca कम्मञ्ञतरोkam·mañ·ña·ta·ro च।ca

     “Yadā so, bho kassapa, ayoguḷo tejosahagato ca hoti vāyosahagato ca āditto sampajjalito sajotibhūto, tadā lahutaro ca hoti mudutaro ca kammaññataro ca.

     “So long as the iron ball is full of heat and air—burning, blazing, and glowing—it’s lighter, softer, and more workable.

320. 320

     यदाya·dā पनpa·na सोso अयोगुळोa·yo·gu·ḷo नेवne·va तेजोसहगतोte·jo·sa·ha·ga·to होतिho·ti नna वायोसहगतोvā·yo·sa·ha·ga·to सीतोsī·to निब्बुतो,nib·bu·to तदाta·dā गरुतरोga·ru·ta·ro चca होतिho·ti पत्थिन्नतरोpat·thin·na·ta·ro चca अकम्मञ्ञतरोa·kam·mañ·ña·ta·ro चा”ति।cā

     Yadā pana so ayoguḷo neva tejosahagato hoti na vāyosahagato sīto nibbuto, tadā garutaro ca hoti patthinnataro ca akammaññataro cā”ti.

     But when it lacks heat and air—cooled and quenched—it’s heavier, stiffer, and less workable.”

321. 321

     “एवमेवe·va·me·va खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña यदायंya·dā·yaṃ कायोkā·yo आयुसहगतोā·yu·sa·ha·ga·to चca होतिho·ti उस्मासहगतोus·mā·sa·ha·ga·to चca विञ्ञाणसहगतोviñ·ñā·ṇa·sa·ha·ga·to च,ca तदाta·dā लहुतरोla·hu·ta·ro चca होतिho·ti मुदुतरोmu·du·ta·ro चca कम्मञ्ञतरोkam·mañ·ña·ta·ro च।ca

     “Evameva kho, rājañña, yadāyaṁ kāyo āyusahagato ca hoti usmāsahagato ca viññāṇasahagato ca, tadā lahutaro ca hoti mudutaro ca kammaññataro ca.

     “In the same way, so long as this body is full of life and warmth and consciousness it’s lighter, softer, and more flexible.

322. 322

     यदाya·dā पनायंpa·nā·yaṃ कायोkā·yo नेवne·va आयुसहगतोā·yu·sa·ha·ga·to होतिho·ti नna उस्मासहगतोus·mā·sa·ha·ga·to नna विञ्ञाणसहगतोviñ·ñā·ṇa·sa·ha·ga·to तदाta·dā गरुतरोga·ru·ta·ro चca होतिho·ti पत्थिन्नतरोpat·thin·na·ta·ro चca अकम्मञ्ञतरोa·kam·mañ·ña·ta·ro च।ca

     Yadā panāyaṁ kāyo neva āyusahagato hoti na usmāsahagato na viññāṇasahagato tadā garutaro ca hoti patthinnataro ca akammaññataro ca.

     But when it lacks life and warmth and consciousness it’s heavier, stiffer, and less flexible.

323. 323

     इमिनापिi·mi·nā·pi खोkho ते,te राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होतु:ho·tu

     Imināpi kho te, rājañña, pariyāyena evaṁ hotu:

     By this method, too, it ought to be proven that

324. 324

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi अत्थिat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko अत्थिat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā अत्थिat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is an afterlife.”

325. 325

     “किञ्चापिkiñ·cā·pi भवंbha·vaṃ कस्सपोkas·sa·po एवमाह,e·va·mā·ha अथa·tha खोkho एवंe·vaṃ मेme एत्थet·tha होति:ho·ti

     “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho evaṁ me ettha hoti:

     “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I think that

326. 326

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is no afterlife.”

327. 327

     “अत्थिat·thi पन,pa·na राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo …पे…pe

     “Atthi pana, rājañña, pariyāyo …pe…

     “Can you prove it?”

328. 328

     अत्थि,at·thi भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo …पे…pe

     atthi, bho kassapa, pariyāyo …pe…

     “I can.”

329. 329

     यथाya·thā कथंka·thaṃ विय,vi·ya राजञ्ञा”ति?rā·jañ·ñā

     yathā kathaṁ viya, rājaññā”ti?

     “How, exactly, chieftain?”

330. 330

     “इधi·dha मे,me भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa पुरिसाpu·ri·sā चोरंco·raṃ आगुचारिंā·gu·cā·riṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā दस्सेन्ति:das·sen·ti

     “Idha me, bho kassapa, purisā coraṁ āgucāriṁ gahetvā dassenti:

     “Suppose they were to arrest a bandit, a criminal and present him to me, saying,

331. 331

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ ते,te भन्ते,bhan·te चोरोco·ro आगुचारी;ā·gu·cā·rī

     ‘ayaṁ te, bhante, coro āgucārī;

     ‘Sir, this is a bandit, a criminal.

332. 332

     इमस्सi·mas·sa यंyaṃ इच्छसि,ic·cha·si तंtaṃ दण्डंdaṇ·ḍaṃ पणेही’ति।pa·ṇe·hī

     imassa yaṁ icchasi, taṁ daṇḍaṁ paṇehī’ti.

     Punish him as you will.’

333. 333

     त्याहंtyā·haṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदामि:va·dā·mi

     Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi:

     I say to them,

334. 334

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भो,bho इमंi·maṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ अनुपहच्चa·nu·pa·hac·ca छविञ्चcha·viñ·ca चम्मञ्चcam·mañ·ca मंसञ्चmaṃ·sañ·ca न्हारुञ्चnhā·ruñ·ca अट्ठिञ्चaṭ·ṭhiñ·ca अट्ठिमिञ्जञ्चaṭ·ṭhi·miñ·jañ·ca जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेथ,vo·ro·pe·tha अप्पेवap·pe·va नामस्सnā·mas·sa जीवंjī·vaṃ निक्खमन्तंnik·kha·man·taṃ पस्सेय्यामा’ति।pas·sey·yā·mā

     ‘tena hi, bho, imaṁ purisaṁ anupahacca chaviñca cammañca maṁsañca nhāruñca aṭṭhiñca aṭṭhimiñjañca jīvitā voropetha, appeva nāmassa jīvaṁ nikkhamantaṁ passeyyāmā’ti.

     ‘Well then, worthy sir, take this man’s life without damaging his outer skin, inner skin, flesh, sinews, bones, or marrow. Hopefully we’ll see his soul escaping.’

335. 335

     तेte मेme ‘साधू’तिsā·dhū पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā तंtaṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ अनुपहच्चa·nu·pa·hac·ca छविञ्चcha·viñ·ca …पे…pe जीविताjī·vi·tā वोरोपेन्ति।vo·ro·pen·ti

     Te me ‘sādhū’ti paṭissutvā taṁ purisaṁ anupahacca chaviñca …pe… jīvitā voropenti.

     They agree, and do what I ask.

336. 336

     यदाya·dā सोso आमतोā·ma·to होति,ho·ti त्याहंtyā·haṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदामि:va·dā·mi

     Yadā so āmato hoti, tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi:

     When he’s nearly dead, I tell them to

337. 337

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भो,bho इमंi·maṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ उत्तानंut·tā·naṃ निपातेथ,ni·pā·te·tha अप्पेवap·pe·va नामस्सnā·mas·sa जीवंjī·vaṃ निक्खमन्तंnik·kha·man·taṃ पस्सेय्यामा’ति।pas·sey·yā·mā

     ‘tena hi, bho, imaṁ purisaṁ uttānaṁ nipātetha, appeva nāmassa jīvaṁ nikkhamantaṁ passeyyāmā’ti.

     lay him on his back in hope of seeing his soul escape.

338. 338

     तेte तंtaṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ उत्तानंut·tā·naṃ निपातेन्ति।ni·pā·ten·ti

     Te taṁ purisaṁ uttānaṁ nipātenti.

     They do so.

339. 339

     नेवस्सne·vas·sa मयंma·yaṃ जीवंjī·vaṃ निक्खमन्तंnik·kha·man·taṃ पस्साम।pas·sā·ma

     Nevassa mayaṁ jīvaṁ nikkhamantaṁ passāma.

     But we don’t see his soul escaping.

340. 340

     त्याहंtyā·haṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदामि:va·dā·mi

     Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi:

     I tell them to

341. 341

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भो,bho इमंi·maṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ अवकुज्जंa·va·kuj·jaṃ निपातेथni·pā·te·tha …

     ‘tena hi, bho, imaṁ purisaṁ avakujjaṁ nipātetha …

     lay him bent over,

342. 342

     पस्सेनpas·se·na निपातेथni·pā·te·tha …

     passena nipātetha …

     to lay him on his side,

343. 343

     दुतियेनdu·ti·ye·na पस्सेनpas·se·na निपातेथni·pā·te·tha …

     dutiyena passena nipātetha …

     to lay him on the other side;

344. 344

     उद्धंud·dhaṃ ठपेथṭha·pe·tha …

     uddhaṁ ṭhapetha …

     to stand him upright,

345. 345

     ओमुद्धकंo·mud·dha·kaṃ ठपेथṭha·pe·tha …

     omuddhakaṁ ṭhapetha …

     to stand him upside down;

346. 346

     पाणिनाpā·ṇi·nā आकोटेथā·ko·ṭe·tha …

     pāṇinā ākoṭetha …

     to strike him with fists,

347. 347

     लेड्डुनाleḍ·ḍu·nā आकोटेथā·ko·ṭe·tha …

     leḍḍunā ākoṭetha …

     stones,

348. 348

     दण्डेनdaṇ·ḍe·na आकोटेथā·ko·ṭe·tha …

     daṇḍena ākoṭetha …

     rods,

349. 349

     सत्थेनsat·the·na आकोटेथā·ko·ṭe·tha …

     satthena ākoṭetha …

     and swords;

350. 350

     ओधुनाथo·dhu·nā·tha सन्धुनाथsan·dhu·nā·tha निद्धुनाथ,nid·dhu·nā·tha अप्पेवap·pe·va नामस्सnā·mas·sa जीवंjī·vaṃ निक्खमन्तंnik·kha·man·taṃ पस्सेय्यामा’ति।pas·sey·yā·mā

     odhunātha sandhunātha niddhunātha, appeva nāmassa jīvaṁ nikkhamantaṁ passeyyāmā’ti.

     and to give him a good shaking in hope of seeing his soul escape.

351. 351

     तेte तंtaṃ पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ ओधुनन्तिo·dhu·nan·ti सन्धुनन्तिsan·dhu·nan·ti निद्धुनन्ति।nid·dhu·nan·ti

     Te taṁ purisaṁ odhunanti sandhunanti niddhunanti.

     They do all these things.

352. 352

     नेवस्सne·vas·sa मयंma·yaṃ जीवंjī·vaṃ निक्खमन्तंnik·kha·man·taṃ पस्साम।pas·sā·ma

     Nevassa mayaṁ jīvaṁ nikkhamantaṁ passāma.

     But we don’t see his soul escaping.

353. 353

     तस्सtas·sa तदेवta·de·va चक्खुcak·khu होतिho·ti तेte रूपा,rū·pā तञ्चायतनंtañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ नप्पटिसंवेदेति।nap·pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·de·ti

     Tassa tadeva cakkhu hoti te rūpā, tañcāyatanaṁ nappaṭisaṁvedeti.

     For him the eye itself is present, and so are those sights. Yet he does not experience that sense-field.

354. 354

     तदेवta·de·va सोतंso·taṃ होतिho·ti तेte सद्दा,sad·dā तञ्चायतनंtañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ नप्पटिसंवेदेति।nap·pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·de·ti

     Tadeva sotaṁ hoti te saddā, tañcāyatanaṁ nappaṭisaṁvedeti.

     The ear itself is present, and so are those sounds. Yet he does not experience that sense-field.

355. 355

     तदेवta·de·va घानंghā·naṃ होतिho·ti तेte गन्धा,gan·dhā तञ्चायतनंtañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ नप्पटिसंवेदेति।nap·pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·de·ti

     Tadeva ghānaṁ hoti te gandhā, tañcāyatanaṁ nappaṭisaṁvedeti.

     The nose itself is present, and so are those smells. Yet he does not experience that sense-field.

356. 356

     सावsā·va जिव्हाjiv·hā होतिho·ti तेte रसा,ra·sā तञ्चायतनंtañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ नप्पटिसंवेदेति।nap·pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·de·ti

     Sāva jivhā hoti te rasā, tañcāyatanaṁ nappaṭisaṁvedeti.

     The tongue itself is present, and so are those tastes. Yet he does not experience that sense-field.

357. 357

     स्वेवsve·va कायोkā·yo होतिho·ti तेte फोट्ठब्बा,phoṭ·ṭhab·bā तञ्चायतनंtañ·cā·ya·ta·naṃ नप्पटिसंवेदेति।nap·pa·ṭi·saṃ·ve·de·ti

     Sveva kāyo hoti te phoṭṭhabbā, tañcāyatanaṁ nappaṭisaṁvedeti.

     The body itself is present, and so are those touches. Yet he does not experience that sense-field.

358. 358

     अयम्पिa·yam·pi खो,kho भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मेme परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Ayampi kho, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti:

     This is how I prove that

359. 359

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is no afterlife.”

360. 360

     2।9। सङ्खधमउपमाsaṅ·kha·dha·ma·u·pa·mā

     2.9. Saṅkhadhamaupamā

     2.9. The Simile of the Horn Blower

361. 361

     “तेनte·na हि,hi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña उपमंu·pa·maṃ तेte करिस्सामि।ka·ris·sā·mi

     “Tena hi, rājañña, upamaṁ te karissāmi.

     “Well then, chieftain, I shall give you a simile.

362. 362

     उपमायu·pa·mā·ya म्’इधेकच्चेm विञ्ञूviñ·ñū पुरिसाpu·ri·sā भासितस्सbhā·si·tas·sa अत्थंat·thaṃ आजानन्ति।ā·jā·nan·ti

     Upamāya m’idhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti.

     For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said.

363. 363

     भूतपुब्बं,bhū·ta·pub·baṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro सङ्खधमोsaṅ·kha·dha·mo सङ्खंsaṅ·khaṃ आदायā·dā·ya पच्चन्तिमंpac·can·ti·maṃ जनपदंja·na·pa·daṃ अगमासि।a·ga·mā·si

     Bhūtapubbaṁ, rājañña, aññataro saṅkhadhamo saṅkhaṁ ādāya paccantimaṁ janapadaṁ agamāsi.

     Once upon a time, a certain horn blower took his horn and traveled to a borderland,

364. 364

     सोso येनye·na अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro गामोgā·mo तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā मज्झेmaj·jhe गामस्सgā·mas·sa ठितोṭhi·to तिक्खत्तुंtik·khat·tuṃ सङ्खंsaṅ·khaṃ उपलापेत्वाu·pa·lā·pet·vā सङ्खंsaṅ·khaṃ भूमियंbhū·mi·yaṃ निक्खिपित्वाnik·khi·pit·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ निसीदि।ni·sī·di

     So yena aññataro gāmo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā majjhe gāmassa ṭhito tikkhattuṁ saṅkhaṁ upalāpetvā saṅkhaṁ bhūmiyaṁ nikkhipitvā ekamantaṁ nisīdi.

     where he went to a certain village. Standing in the middle of the village, he sounded his horn three times, then placed it on the ground and sat down to one side.

365. 365

     अथa·tha खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña तेसंte·saṃ पच्चन्तजनपदानंpac·can·ta·ja·na·pa·dā·naṃ मनुस्सानंma·nus·sā·naṃ एतदहोसि:e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho, rājañña, tesaṁ paccantajanapadānaṁ manussānaṁ etadahosi:

     Then the people of the borderland thought,

366. 366

     ‘अम्भोam·bho कस्सkas·sa नुnu खोkho एसोe·so सद्दोsad·do एवंरजनीयोe·vaṃ·ra·ja·nī·yo एवङ्कमनीयोe·vaṅ·ka·ma·nī·yo एवंमदनीयोe·vaṃ·ma·da·nī·yo एवम्बन्धनीयोe·vam·ban·dha·nī·yo एवंमुच्छनीयो’ति।e·vaṃ·muc·cha·nī·yo

     ‘ambho kassa nu kho eso saddo evaṁrajanīyo evaṅkamanīyo evaṁmadanīyo evambandhanīyo evaṁmucchanīyo’ti.

     ‘Oh my, what is making this sound, so arousing, sensuous, intoxicating, infatuating, and captivating?’

367. 367

     सन्निपतित्वाsan·ni·pa·tit·vā तंtaṃ सङ्खधमंsaṅ·kha·dha·maṃ एतदवोचुं:e·ta·da·vo·cuṃ

     Sannipatitvā taṁ saṅkhadhamaṁ etadavocuṁ:

     They gathered around the horn blower and said,

368. 368

     ‘अम्भो,am·bho कस्सkas·sa नुnu खोkho एसोe·so सद्दोsad·do एवंरजनीयोe·vaṃ·ra·ja·nī·yo एवङ्कमनीयोe·vaṅ·ka·ma·nī·yo एवंमदनीयोe·vaṃ·ma·da·nī·yo एवम्बन्धनीयोe·vam·ban·dha·nī·yo एवंमुच्छनीयो’ति।e·vaṃ·muc·cha·nī·yo

     ‘ambho, kassa nu kho eso saddo evaṁrajanīyo evaṅkamanīyo evaṁmadanīyo evambandhanīyo evaṁmucchanīyo’ti.

     ‘Oh my, what is making this sound, so arousing, sensuous, intoxicating, infatuating, and captivating?’

369. 369

     ‘एसोe·so खो,kho भो,bho सङ्खोsaṅ·kho नामnā·ma यस्सेसोyas·se·so सद्दोsad·do एवंरजनीयोe·vaṃ·ra·ja·nī·yo एवङ्कमनीयोe·vaṅ·ka·ma·nī·yo एवंमदनीयोe·vaṃ·ma·da·nī·yo एवम्बन्धनीयोe·vam·ban·dha·nī·yo एवंमुच्छनीयो’ति।e·vaṃ·muc·cha·nī·yo

     ‘Eso kho, bho, saṅkho nāma yasseso saddo evaṁrajanīyo evaṅkamanīyo evaṁmadanīyo evambandhanīyo evaṁmucchanīyo’ti.

     ‘The sound is made by this, which is called a horn.’

370. 370

     तेte तंtaṃ सङ्खंsaṅ·khaṃ उत्तानंut·tā·naṃ निपातेसुं:ni·pā·te·suṃ

     Te taṁ saṅkhaṁ uttānaṁ nipātesuṁ:

     They laid that horn on its back, saying,

371. 371

     ‘वदेहि,va·de·hi भोbho सङ्ख,saṅ·kha वदेहि,va·de·hi भोbho सङ्खा’ति।saṅ·khā

     ‘vadehi, bho saṅkha, vadehi, bho saṅkhā’ti.

     ‘Speak, good horn! Speak, good horn!’

372. 372

     नेवne·va सोso सङ्खोsaṅ·kho सद्दमकासि।sad·da·ma·kā·si

     Neva so saṅkho saddamakāsi.

     But still the horn made no sound.

373. 373

     तेte तंtaṃ सङ्खंsaṅ·khaṃ अवकुज्जंa·va·kuj·jaṃ निपातेसुं,ni·pā·te·suṃ पस्सेनpas·se·na निपातेसुं,ni·pā·te·suṃ दुतियेनdu·ti·ye·na पस्सेनpas·se·na निपातेसुं,ni·pā·te·suṃ उद्धंud·dhaṃ ठपेसुं,ṭha·pe·suṃ ओमुद्धकंo·mud·dha·kaṃ ठपेसुं,ṭha·pe·suṃ पाणिनाpā·ṇi·nā आकोटेसुं,ā·ko·ṭe·suṃ लेड्डुनाleḍ·ḍu·nā आकोटेसुं,ā·ko·ṭe·suṃ दण्डेनdaṇ·ḍe·na आकोटेसुं,ā·ko·ṭe·suṃ सत्थेनsat·the·na आकोटेसुं,ā·ko·ṭe·suṃ ओधुनिंसुo·dhu·niṃ·su सन्धुनिंसुsan·dhu·niṃ·su निद्धुनिंसु:nid·dhu·niṃ·su

     Te taṁ saṅkhaṁ avakujjaṁ nipātesuṁ, passena nipātesuṁ, dutiyena passena nipātesuṁ, uddhaṁ ṭhapesuṁ, omuddhakaṁ ṭhapesuṁ, pāṇinā ākoṭesuṁ, leḍḍunā ākoṭesuṁ, daṇḍena ākoṭesuṁ, satthena ākoṭesuṁ, odhuniṁsu sandhuniṁsu niddhuniṁsu:

     Then they lay the horn bent over, they lay it on its side, they lay it on its other side; they stood it upright, they stood it upside down; they struck it with fists, stones, rods, and swords; and they gave it a good shake, saying,

374. 374

     ‘वदेहि,va·de·hi भोbho सङ्ख,saṅ·kha वदेहि,va·de·hi भोbho सङ्खा’ति।saṅ·khā

     ‘vadehi, bho saṅkha, vadehi, bho saṅkhā’ti.

     ‘Speak, good horn! Speak, good horn!’

375. 375

     नेवne·va सोso सङ्खोsaṅ·kho सद्दमकासि।sad·da·ma·kā·si

     Neva so saṅkho saddamakāsi.

     But still the horn made no sound.

376. 376

     अथa·tha खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña तस्सtas·sa सङ्खधमस्सsaṅ·kha·dha·mas·sa एतदहोसि:e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho, rājañña, tassa saṅkhadhamassa etadahosi:

     So the horn blower thought,

377. 377

     ‘यावyā·va बालाbā·lā इमेi·me पच्चन्तजनपदाpac·can·ta·ja·na·pa·dā मनुस्सा,ma·nus·sā कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma अयोनिसोa·yo·ni·so सङ्खसद्दंsaṅ·kha·sad·daṃ गवेसिस्सन्ती’ति।ga·ve·sis·san·tī

     ‘yāva bālā ime paccantajanapadā manussā, kathañhi nāma ayoniso saṅkhasaddaṁ gavesissantī’ti.

     ‘How foolish are these borderland folk! For how on earth can they seek the sound of a horn so irrationally?’

378. 378

     तेसंte·saṃ पेक्खमानानंpek·kha·mā·nā·naṃ सङ्खंsaṅ·khaṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā तिक्खत्तुंtik·khat·tuṃ सङ्खंsaṅ·khaṃ उपलापेत्वाu·pa·lā·pet·vā सङ्खंsaṅ·khaṃ आदायā·dā·ya पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Tesaṁ pekkhamānānaṁ saṅkhaṁ gahetvā tikkhattuṁ saṅkhaṁ upalāpetvā saṅkhaṁ ādāya pakkāmi.

     And as they looked on, he picked up the horn, sounded it three times, and took it away with him.

379. 379

     अथa·tha खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña तेसंte·saṃ पच्चन्तजनपदानंpac·can·ta·ja·na·pa·dā·naṃ मनुस्सानंma·nus·sā·naṃ एतदहोसि:e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho, rājañña, tesaṁ paccantajanapadānaṁ manussānaṁ etadahosi:

     Then the people of the borderland thought,

380. 380

     ‘यदाya·dā किर,ki·ra भो,bho अयंa·yaṃ सङ्खोsaṅ·kho नामnā·ma पुरिससहगतोpu·ri·sa·sa·ha·ga·to चca होतिho·ti वायामसहगतोvā·yā·ma·sa·ha·ga·to चca वायुसहगतोvā·yu·sa·ha·ga·to च,ca तदायंta·dā·yaṃ सङ्खोsaṅ·kho सद्दंsad·daṃ करोति,ka·ro·ti यदाya·dā पनायंpa·nā·yaṃ सङ्खोsaṅ·kho नेवne·va पुरिससहगतोpu·ri·sa·sa·ha·ga·to होतिho·ti नna वायामसहगतोvā·yā·ma·sa·ha·ga·to नna वायुसहगतो,vā·yu·sa·ha·ga·to नायंnā·yaṃ सङ्खोsaṅ·kho सद्दंsad·daṃ करोती’ति।ka·ro·tī

     ‘yadā kira, bho, ayaṁ saṅkho nāma purisasahagato ca hoti vāyāmasahagato ca vāyusahagato ca, tadāyaṁ saṅkho saddaṁ karoti, yadā panāyaṁ saṅkho neva purisasahagato hoti na vāyāmasahagato na vāyusahagato, nāyaṁ saṅkho saddaṁ karotī’ti.

     ‘So, it seems, when what is called a horn is accompanied by a person, effort, and wind, it makes a sound. But when these things are absent it makes no sound.’

381. 381

     एवमेवe·va·me·va खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña यदायंya·dā·yaṃ कायोkā·yo आयुसहगतोā·yu·sa·ha·ga·to चca होतिho·ti उस्मासहगतोus·mā·sa·ha·ga·to चca विञ्ञाणसहगतोviñ·ñā·ṇa·sa·ha·ga·to च,ca तदाta·dā अभिक्कमतिपिa·bhik·ka·ma·ti·pi पटिक्कमतिपिpa·ṭik·ka·ma·ti·pi तिट्ठतिपिtiṭ·ṭha·ti·pi निसीदतिपिni·sī·da·ti·pi सेय्यम्पिsey·yam·pi कप्पेति,kap·pe·ti चक्खुनापिcak·khu·nā·pi रूपंrū·paṃ पस्सति,pas·sa·ti सोतेनपिso·te·na·pi सद्दंsad·daṃ सुणाति,su·ṇā·ti घानेनपिghā·ne·na·pi गन्धंgan·dhaṃ घायति,ghā·ya·ti जिव्हायपिjiv·hā·ya·pi रसंra·saṃ सायति,sā·ya·ti कायेनपिkā·ye·na·pi फोट्ठब्बंphoṭ·ṭhab·baṃ फुसति,phu·sa·ti मनसापिma·na·sā·pi धम्मंdham·maṃ विजानाति।vi·jā·nā·ti

     Evameva kho, rājañña, yadāyaṁ kāyo āyusahagato ca hoti usmāsahagato ca viññāṇasahagato ca, tadā abhikkamatipi paṭikkamatipi tiṭṭhatipi nisīdatipi seyyampi kappeti, cakkhunāpi rūpaṁ passati, sotenapi saddaṁ suṇāti, ghānenapi gandhaṁ ghāyati, jivhāyapi rasaṁ sāyati, kāyenapi phoṭṭhabbaṁ phusati, manasāpi dhammaṁ vijānāti.

     In the same way, so long as this body is full of life and warmth and consciousness it walks back and forth, stands, sits, and lies down. It sees sights with the eye, hears sounds with the ear, smells odors with the nose, tastes flavors with the tongue, encounters touches with the body, and knows ideas with the mind.

382. 382

     यदाya·dā पनायंpa·nā·yaṃ कायोkā·yo नेवne·va आयुसहगतोā·yu·sa·ha·ga·to होति,ho·ti नna उस्मासहगतो,us·mā·sa·ha·ga·to नna विञ्ञाणसहगतो,viñ·ñā·ṇa·sa·ha·ga·to तदाta·dā नेवne·va अभिक्कमतिa·bhik·ka·ma·ti नna पटिक्कमतिpa·ṭik·ka·ma·ti नna तिट्ठतिtiṭ·ṭha·ti नna निसीदतिni·sī·da·ti नna सेय्यंsey·yaṃ कप्पेति,kap·pe·ti चक्खुनापिcak·khu·nā·pi रूपंrū·paṃ नna पस्सति,pas·sa·ti सोतेनपिso·te·na·pi सद्दंsad·daṃ नna सुणाति,su·ṇā·ti घानेनपिghā·ne·na·pi गन्धंgan·dhaṃ नna घायति,ghā·ya·ti जिव्हायपिjiv·hā·ya·pi रसंra·saṃ नna सायति,sā·ya·ti कायेनपिkā·ye·na·pi फोट्ठब्बंphoṭ·ṭhab·baṃ नna फुसति,phu·sa·ti मनसापिma·na·sā·pi धम्मंdham·maṃ नna विजानाति।vi·jā·nā·ti

     Yadā panāyaṁ kāyo neva āyusahagato hoti, na usmāsahagato, na viññāṇasahagato, tadā neva abhikkamati na paṭikkamati na tiṭṭhati na nisīdati na seyyaṁ kappeti, cakkhunāpi rūpaṁ na passati, sotenapi saddaṁ na suṇāti, ghānenapi gandhaṁ na ghāyati, jivhāyapi rasaṁ na sāyati, kāyenapi phoṭṭhabbaṁ na phusati, manasāpi dhammaṁ na vijānāti.

     But when it lacks life and warmth and consciousness it does none of these things.

383. 383

     इमिनापिi·mi·nā·pi खोkho ते,te राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होतु:ho·tu

     Imināpi kho te, rājañña, pariyāyena evaṁ hotu:

     By this method, too, it ought to be proven that

384. 384

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi अत्थिat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko अत्थिat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā अत्थिat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi atthi paro loko, atthi sattā opapātikā, atthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is an afterlife.”

385. 385

     “किञ्चापिkiñ·cā·pi भवंbha·vaṃ कस्सपोkas·sa·po एवमाह,e·va·mā·ha अथa·tha खोkho एवंe·vaṃ मेme एत्थet·tha होति:ho·ti

     “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho evaṁ me ettha hoti:

     “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I think that

386. 386

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is no afterlife.”

387. 387

     “अत्थिat·thi पन,pa·na राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo …पे…pe

     “Atthi pana, rājañña, pariyāyo …pe…

     “Can you prove it?”

388. 388

     अत्थि,at·thi भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa परियायोpa·ri·yā·yo …पे…pe

     atthi, bho kassapa, pariyāyo …pe…

     “I can.”

389. 389

     यथाya·thā कथंka·thaṃ विय,vi·ya राजञ्ञा”ति?rā·jañ·ñā

     yathā kathaṁ viya, rājaññā”ti?

     “How, exactly, chieftain?”

390. 390

     “इधi·dha मे,me भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa पुरिसाpu·ri·sā चोरंco·raṃ आगुचारिंā·gu·cā·riṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā दस्सेन्ति:das·sen·ti

     “Idha me, bho kassapa, purisā coraṁ āgucāriṁ gahetvā dassenti:

     “Suppose they were to arrest a bandit, a criminal and present him to me, saying,

391. 391

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ ते,te भन्ते,bhan·te चोरोco·ro आगुचारी,ā·gu·cā·rī

     ‘ayaṁ te, bhante, coro āgucārī,

     ‘Sir, this is a bandit, a criminal.

392. 392

     इमस्सi·mas·sa यंyaṃ इच्छसि,ic·cha·si तंtaṃ दण्डंdaṇ·ḍaṃ पणेही’ति।pa·ṇe·hī

     imassa yaṁ icchasi, taṁ daṇḍaṁ paṇehī’ti.

     Punish him as you will.’

393. 393

     त्याहंtyā·haṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदामि:va·dā·mi

     Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi:

     I say to them,

394. 394

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भो,bho इमस्सi·mas·sa पुरिसस्सpu·ri·sas·sa छविंcha·viṃ छिन्दथ,chin·da·tha अप्पेवap·pe·va नामस्सnā·mas·sa जीवंjī·vaṃ पस्सेय्यामा’ति।pas·sey·yā·mā

     ‘tena hi, bho, imassa purisassa chaviṁ chindatha, appeva nāmassa jīvaṁ passeyyāmā’ti.

     ‘Well then, worthy sir, cut open this man’s outer skin. Hopefully we might see his soul.’

395. 395

     तेte तस्सtas·sa पुरिसस्सpu·ri·sas·sa छविंcha·viṃ छिन्दन्ति।chin·dan·ti

     Te tassa purisassa chaviṁ chindanti.

     They cut open his outer skin,

396. 396

     नेवस्सne·vas·sa मयंma·yaṃ जीवंjī·vaṃ पस्साम।pas·sā·ma

     Nevassa mayaṁ jīvaṁ passāma.

     but we see no soul.

397. 397

     त्याहंtyā·haṃ एवंe·vaṃ वदामि:va·dā·mi

     Tyāhaṁ evaṁ vadāmi:

     I say to them,

398. 398

     ‘तेनte·na हि,hi भो,bho इमस्सi·mas·sa पुरिसस्सpu·ri·sas·sa चम्मंcam·maṃ छिन्दथ,chin·da·tha मंसंmaṃ·saṃ छिन्दथ,chin·da·tha न्हारुंnhā·ruṃ छिन्दथ,chin·da·tha अट्ठिंaṭ·ṭhiṃ छिन्दथ,chin·da·tha अट्ठिमिञ्जंaṭ·ṭhi·miñ·jaṃ छिन्दथ,chin·da·tha अप्पेवap·pe·va नामस्सnā·mas·sa जीवंjī·vaṃ पस्सेय्यामा’ति।pas·sey·yā·mā

     ‘tena hi, bho, imassa purisassa cammaṁ chindatha, maṁsaṁ chindatha, nhāruṁ chindatha, aṭṭhiṁ chindatha, aṭṭhimiñjaṁ chindatha, appeva nāmassa jīvaṁ passeyyāmā’ti.

     ‘Well then, worthy sir, cut open his inner skin, flesh, sinews, bones, or marrow. Hopefully we’ll see his soul.’

399. 399

     तेte तस्सtas·sa पुरिसस्सpu·ri·sas·sa अट्ठिमिञ्जंaṭ·ṭhi·miñ·jaṃ छिन्दन्ति,chin·dan·ti नेवस्सne·vas·sa मयंma·yaṃ जीवंjī·vaṃ पस्सेय्याम।pas·sey·yā·ma

     Te tassa purisassa aṭṭhimiñjaṁ chindanti, nevassa mayaṁ jīvaṁ passeyyāma.

     They do so, but we see no soul.

400. 400

     अयम्पिa·yam·pi खो,kho भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa परियायो,pa·ri·yā·yo येनye·na मेme परियायेनpa·ri·yā·ye·na एवंe·vaṃ होति:ho·ti

     Ayampi kho, bho kassapa, pariyāyo, yena me pariyāyena evaṁ hoti:

     This is how I prove that

401. 401

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti.

     there is no afterlife.”

402. 402

     2।10। अग्गिकजटिलउपमाag·gi·ka·ja·ṭi·la·u·pa·mā

     2.10. Aggikajaṭilaupamā

     2.10. The Simile of the Fire-Worshiping Matted-Hair Ascetic

403. 403

     “तेनte·na हि,hi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña उपमंu·pa·maṃ तेte करिस्सामि।ka·ris·sā·mi

     “Tena hi, rājañña, upamaṁ te karissāmi.

     “Well then, chieftain, I shall give you a simile.

404. 404

     उपमायu·pa·mā·ya म्’इधेकच्चेm विञ्ञूviñ·ñū पुरिसाpu·ri·sā भासितस्सbhā·si·tas·sa अत्थंat·thaṃ आजानन्ति।ā·jā·nan·ti

     Upamāya m’idhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti.

     For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said.

405. 405

     भूतपुब्बं,bhū·ta·pub·baṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro अग्गिकोag·gi·ko जटिलोja·ṭi·lo अरञ्ञायतनेa·rañ·ñā·ya·ta·ne पण्णकुटियाpaṇ·ṇa·ku·ṭi·yā सम्मति।sam·ma·ti

     Bhūtapubbaṁ, rājañña, aññataro aggiko jaṭilo araññāyatane paṇṇakuṭiyā sammati.

     Once upon a time, a certain fire-worshiping matted-hair ascetic settled in a leaf hut in a wilderness region.

406. 406

     अथa·tha खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro जनपदेja·na·pa·de सत्थोsat·tho वुट्ठासि।vuṭ·ṭhā·si

     Atha kho, rājañña, aññataro janapade sattho vuṭṭhāsi.

     Then a caravan came out from a certain country.

407. 407

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso सत्थोsat·tho तस्सtas·sa अग्गिकस्सag·gi·kas·sa जटिलस्सja·ṭi·las·sa अस्समस्सas·sa·mas·sa सामन्ताsā·man·tā एकरत्तिंe·ka·rat·tiṃ वसित्वाva·sit·vā पक्कामि।pak·kā·mi

     Atha kho so sattho tassa aggikassa jaṭilassa assamassa sāmantā ekarattiṁ vasitvā pakkāmi.

     It stayed for one night not far from that ascetic’s hermitage, and then moved on.

408. 408

     अथa·tha खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña तस्सtas·sa अग्गिकस्सag·gi·kas·sa जटिलस्सja·ṭi·las·sa एतदहोसि:e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho, rājañña, tassa aggikassa jaṭilassa etadahosi:

     The ascetic thought,

409. 409

     ‘यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ येनye·na सोso सत्थवासोsat·tha·vā·so तेनुपसङ्कमेय्यं,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mey·yaṃ अप्पेवap·pe·va नामेत्थnā·met·tha किञ्चिkiñ·ci उपकरणंu·pa·ka·ra·ṇaṃ अधिगच्छेय्यन्’ति।a·dhi·gac·chey·yan

     ‘yannūnāhaṁ yena so satthavāso tenupasaṅkameyyaṁ, appeva nāmettha kiñci upakaraṇaṁ adhigaccheyyan’ti.

     ‘Why don’t I go to that caravan’s campsite? Hopefully I’ll find something useful there.’

410. 410

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso अग्गिकोag·gi·ko जटिलोja·ṭi·lo कालस्सेवkā·las·se·va वुट्ठायvuṭ·ṭhā·ya येनye·na सोso सत्थवासोsat·tha·vā·so तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā अद्दसad·da·sa तस्मिंtas·miṃ सत्थवासेsat·tha·vā·se दहरंda·ha·raṃ कुमारंku·mā·raṃ मन्दंman·daṃ उत्तानसेय्यकंut·tā·na·sey·ya·kaṃ छड्डितं।chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ

     Atha kho so aggiko jaṭilo kālasseva vuṭṭhāya yena so satthavāso tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā addasa tasmiṁ satthavāse daharaṁ kumāraṁ mandaṁ uttānaseyyakaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ.

     So he went, and he saw a little baby boy abandoned there.

411. 411

     दिस्वानस्सdis·vā·nas·sa एतदहोसि:e·ta·da·ho·si

     Disvānassa etadahosi:

     When he saw this he thought,

412. 412

     ‘नna खोkho मेme तंtaṃ पतिरूपंpa·ti·rū·paṃ यंyaṃ मेme पेक्खमानस्सpek·kha·mā·nas·sa मनुस्सभूतोma·nus·sa·bhū·to कालङ्करेय्य;kā·laṅ·ka·rey·ya

     ‘na kho me taṁ patirūpaṁ yaṁ me pekkhamānassa manussabhūto kālaṅkareyya;

     ‘It’s not proper for me to look on while a human being dies.

413. 413

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ इमंi·maṃ दारकंdā·ra·kaṃ अस्समंas·sa·maṃ नेत्वाnet·vā आपादेय्यंā·pā·dey·yaṃ पोसेय्यंpo·sey·yaṃ वड्ढेय्यन्’ति।vaḍ·ḍhey·yan

     yannūnāhaṁ imaṁ dārakaṁ assamaṁ netvā āpādeyyaṁ poseyyaṁ vaḍḍheyyan’ti.

     Why don’t I bring this boy back to my hermitage, nurse him, provide for him, and raise him?’

414. 414

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso अग्गिकोag·gi·ko जटिलोja·ṭi·lo तंtaṃ दारकंdā·ra·kaṃ अस्समंas·sa·maṃ नेत्वाnet·vā आपादेसिā·pā·de·si पोसेसिpo·se·si वड्ढेसि।vaḍ·ḍhe·si

     Atha kho so aggiko jaṭilo taṁ dārakaṁ assamaṁ netvā āpādesi posesi vaḍḍhesi.

     So that’s what he did.

415. 415

     यदाya·dā सोso दारकोdā·ra·ko दसवस्सुद्देसिकोda·sa·vas·sud·de·si·ko वाvā होतिho·ti द्वादसवस्सुद्देसिकोdvā·da·sa·vas·sud·de·si·ko वा,vā अथa·tha खोkho तस्सtas·sa अग्गिकस्सag·gi·kas·sa जटिलस्सja·ṭi·las·sa जनपदेja·na·pa·de कञ्चिदेवkañ·ci·de·va करणीयंka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ उप्पज्जि।up·paj·ji

     Yadā so dārako dasavassuddesiko vā hoti dvādasavassuddesiko vā, atha kho tassa aggikassa jaṭilassa janapade kañcideva karaṇīyaṁ uppajji.

     When the boy was ten or twelve years old, the ascetic had some business come up in the country.

416. 416

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso अग्गिकोag·gi·ko जटिलोja·ṭi·lo तंtaṃ दारकंdā·ra·kaṃ एतदवोच:e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho so aggiko jaṭilo taṁ dārakaṁ etadavoca:

     So he said to the boy,

417. 417

     ‘इच्छामहं,ic·chā·ma·haṃ तात,tā·ta जनपदंja·na·pa·daṃ गन्तुं;gan·tuṃ

     ‘icchāmahaṁ, tāta, janapadaṁ gantuṁ;

     ‘My dear, I wish to go to the country.

418. 418

     अग्गिं,ag·giṃ तात,tā·ta परिचरेय्यासि।pa·ri·ca·rey·yā·si

     aggiṁ, tāta, paricareyyāsi.

     Serve the sacred flame.

419. 419

     माmā चca तेte अग्गिag·gi निब्बायि।nib·bā·yi

     Mā ca te aggi nibbāyi.

     Do not extinguish it.

420. 420

     सचेsa·ce चca तेte अग्गिag·gi निब्बायेय्य,nib·bā·yey·ya अयंa·yaṃ वासीvā·sī इमानिi·mā·ni कट्ठानिkaṭ·ṭhā·ni इदंi·daṃ अरणिसहितं,a·ra·ṇi·sa·hi·taṃ अग्गिंag·giṃ निब्बत्तेत्वाnib·bat·tet·vā अग्गिंag·giṃ परिचरेय्यासी’ति।pa·ri·ca·rey·yā·sī

     Sace ca te aggi nibbāyeyya, ayaṁ vāsī imāni kaṭṭhāni idaṁ araṇisahitaṁ, aggiṁ nibbattetvā aggiṁ paricareyyāsī’ti.

     But if you should extinguish it, here is the hatchet, the firewood, and the bundle of drill-sticks. Light the fire and serve it.’

421. 421

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso अग्गिकोag·gi·ko जटिलोja·ṭi·lo तंtaṃ दारकंdā·ra·kaṃ एवंe·vaṃ अनुसासित्वाa·nu·sā·sit·vā जनपदंja·na·pa·daṃ अगमासि।a·ga·mā·si

     Atha kho so aggiko jaṭilo taṁ dārakaṁ evaṁ anusāsitvā janapadaṁ agamāsi.

     And having instructed the boy, the ascetic went to the country.

422. 422

     तस्सtas·sa खिड्डापसुतस्सkhiḍ·ḍā·pa·su·tas·sa अग्गिag·gi निब्बायि।nib·bā·yi

     Tassa khiḍḍāpasutassa aggi nibbāyi.

     But the boy was so engrossed in his play, the fire went out.

423. 423

     अथa·tha खोkho तस्सtas·sa दारकस्सdā·ra·kas·sa एतदहोसि:e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho tassa dārakassa etadahosi:

     He thought,

424. 424

     ‘पिताpi·tā खोkho मंmaṃ एवंe·vaṃ अवच:a·va·ca

     ‘pitā kho maṁ evaṁ avaca:

     ‘My father told me to serve the sacred flame.

425. 425

     “अग्गिं,ag·giṃ तात,tā·ta परिचरेय्यासि।pa·ri·ca·rey·yā·si

     “aggiṁ, tāta, paricareyyāsi.

     (Pāli only)

426. 426

     माmā चca तेte अग्गिag·gi निब्बायि।nib·bā·yi

     Mā ca te aggi nibbāyi.

     (Pāli only)

427. 427

     सचेsa·ce चca तेte अग्गिag·gi निब्बायेय्य,nib·bā·yey·ya अयंa·yaṃ वासीvā·sī इमानिi·mā·ni कट्ठानिkaṭ·ṭhā·ni इदंi·daṃ अरणिसहितं,a·ra·ṇi·sa·hi·taṃ अग्गिंag·giṃ निब्बत्तेत्वाnib·bat·tet·vā अग्गिंag·giṃ परिचरेय्यासी”ति।pa·ri·ca·rey·yā·sī

     Sace ca te aggi nibbāyeyya, ayaṁ vāsī imāni kaṭṭhāni idaṁ araṇisahitaṁ, aggiṁ nibbattetvā aggiṁ paricareyyāsī”ti.

     (Pāli only)

428. 428

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ अग्गिंag·giṃ निब्बत्तेत्वाnib·bat·tet·vā अग्गिंag·giṃ परिचरेय्यन्’ति।pa·ri·ca·rey·yan

     Yannūnāhaṁ aggiṁ nibbattetvā aggiṁ paricareyyan’ti.

     Why don’t I light it again and serve it?’

429. 429

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso दारकोdā·ra·ko अरणिसहितंa·ra·ṇi·sa·hi·taṃ वासियाvā·si·yā तच्छि:tac·chi

     Atha kho so dārako araṇisahitaṁ vāsiyā tacchi:

     So he chopped the bundle of drill-sticks with the hatchet, thinking,

430. 430

     ‘अप्पेवap·pe·va नामnā·ma अग्गिंag·giṃ अधिगच्छेय्यन्’ति।a·dhi·gac·chey·yan

     ‘appeva nāma aggiṁ adhigaccheyyan’ti.

     ‘Hopefully I’ll get a fire!’

431. 431

     नेवne·va सोso अग्गिंag·giṃ अधिगच्छि।a·dhi·gac·chi

     Neva so aggiṁ adhigacchi.

     But he still got no fire.

432. 432

     अरणिसहितंa·ra·ṇi·sa·hi·taṃ द्विधाdvi·dhā फालेसि,phā·le·si तिधाti·dhā फालेसि,phā·le·si चतुधाca·tu·dhā फालेसि,phā·le·si पञ्चधाpañ·ca·dhā फालेसि,phā·le·si दसधाda·sa·dhā फालेसि,phā·le·si सतधाsa·ta·dhā फालेसि,phā·le·si सकलिकंsa·ka·li·kaṃ सकलिकंsa·ka·li·kaṃ अकासि,a·kā·si सकलिकंsa·ka·li·kaṃ सकलिकंsa·ka·li·kaṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā उदुक्खलेu·duk·kha·le कोट्टेसि,koṭ·ṭe·si उदुक्खलेu·duk·kha·le कोट्टेत्वाkoṭ·ṭet·vā महावातेma·hā·vā·te ओपुनि:o·pu·ni

     Araṇisahitaṁ dvidhā phālesi, tidhā phālesi, catudhā phālesi, pañcadhā phālesi, dasadhā phālesi, satadhā phālesi, sakalikaṁ sakalikaṁ akāsi, sakalikaṁ sakalikaṁ karitvā udukkhale koṭṭesi, udukkhale koṭṭetvā mahāvāte opuni:

     He split the bundle of drill-sticks into two, three, four, five, ten, or a hundred parts. He chopped them into splinters, pounded them in a mortar, and swept them away in a strong wind, thinking,

433. 433

     ‘अप्पेवap·pe·va नामnā·ma अग्गिंag·giṃ अधिगच्छेय्यन्’ति।a·dhi·gac·chey·yan

     ‘appeva nāma aggiṁ adhigaccheyyan’ti.

     ‘Hopefully I’ll get a fire!’

434. 434

     नेवne·va सोso अग्गिंag·giṃ अधिगच्छि।a·dhi·gac·chi

     Neva so aggiṁ adhigacchi.

     But he still got no fire.

435. 435

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso अग्गिकोag·gi·ko जटिलोja·ṭi·lo जनपदेja·na·pa·de तंtaṃ करणीयंka·ra·ṇī·yaṃ तीरेत्वाtī·ret·vā येनye·na सकोsa·ko अस्समोas·sa·mo तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā तंtaṃ दारकंdā·ra·kaṃ एतदवोच:e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho so aggiko jaṭilo janapade taṁ karaṇīyaṁ tīretvā yena sako assamo tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā taṁ dārakaṁ etadavoca:

     Then the matted-hair ascetic, having concluded his business in the country, returned to his own hermitage, and said to the boy,

436. 436

     ‘कच्चिkac·ci ते,te तात,tā·ta अग्गिag·gi नna निब्बुतो’ति?nib·bu·to

     ‘kacci te, tāta, aggi na nibbuto’ti?

     ‘I trust, my dear, that the fire didn’t go out?’

437. 437

     ‘इधi·dha मे,me तात,tā·ta खिड्डापसुतस्सkhiḍ·ḍā·pa·su·tas·sa अग्गिag·gi निब्बायि।nib·bā·yi

     ‘Idha me, tāta, khiḍḍāpasutassa aggi nibbāyi.

     And the boy told him what had happened.

438. 438

     तस्सtas·sa मेme एतदहोसि:e·ta·da·ho·si

     Tassa me etadahosi:

     (Pāli only)

439. 439

     “पिताpi·tā खोkho मंmaṃ एवंe·vaṃ अवचa·va·ca अग्गिं,ag·giṃ तात,tā·ta परिचरेय्यासि।pa·ri·ca·rey·yā·si

     “pitā kho maṁ evaṁ avaca aggiṁ, tāta, paricareyyāsi.

     (Pāli only)

440. 440

     माmā चca ते,te तात,tā·ta अग्गिag·gi निब्बायि।nib·bā·yi

     Mā ca te, tāta, aggi nibbāyi.

     (Pāli only)

441. 441

     सचेsa·ce चca तेte अग्गिag·gi निब्बायेय्य,nib·bā·yey·ya अयंa·yaṃ वासीvā·sī इमानिi·mā·ni कट्ठानिkaṭ·ṭhā·ni इदंi·daṃ अरणिसहितं,a·ra·ṇi·sa·hi·taṃ अग्गिंag·giṃ निब्बत्तेत्वाnib·bat·tet·vā अग्गिंag·giṃ परिचरेय्यासीति।pa·ri·ca·rey·yā·sī·ti

     Sace ca te aggi nibbāyeyya, ayaṁ vāsī imāni kaṭṭhāni idaṁ araṇisahitaṁ, aggiṁ nibbattetvā aggiṁ paricareyyāsīti.

     (Pāli only)

442. 442

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ अग्गिंag·giṃ निब्बत्तेत्वाnib·bat·tet·vā अग्गिंag·giṃ परिचरेय्यन्”ति।pa·ri·ca·rey·yan

     Yannūnāhaṁ aggiṁ nibbattetvā aggiṁ paricareyyan”ti.

     (Pāli only)

443. 443

     अथa·tha ख्वाहं,khvā·haṃ तात,tā·ta अरणिसहितंa·ra·ṇi·sa·hi·taṃ वासियाvā·si·yā तच्छिं:tac·chiṃ

     Atha khvāhaṁ, tāta, araṇisahitaṁ vāsiyā tacchiṁ:

     (Pāli only)

444. 444

     “अप्पेवap·pe·va नामnā·ma अग्गिंag·giṃ अधिगच्छेय्यन्”ति।a·dhi·gac·chey·yan

     “appeva nāma aggiṁ adhigaccheyyan”ti.

     (Pāli only)

445. 445

     नेवाहंne·vā·haṃ अग्गिंag·giṃ अधिगच्छिं।a·dhi·gac·chiṃ

     Nevāhaṁ aggiṁ adhigacchiṁ.

     (Pāli only)

446. 446

     अरणिसहितंa·ra·ṇi·sa·hi·taṃ द्विधाdvi·dhā फालेसिं,phā·le·siṃ तिधाti·dhā फालेसिं,phā·le·siṃ चतुधाca·tu·dhā फालेसिं,phā·le·siṃ पञ्चधाpañ·ca·dhā फालेसिं,phā·le·siṃ दसधाda·sa·dhā फालेसिं,phā·le·siṃ सतधाsa·ta·dhā फालेसिं,phā·le·siṃ सकलिकंsa·ka·li·kaṃ सकलिकंsa·ka·li·kaṃ अकासिं,a·kā·siṃ सकलिकंsa·ka·li·kaṃ सकलिकंsa·ka·li·kaṃ करित्वाka·rit·vā उदुक्खलेu·duk·kha·le कोट्टेसिं,koṭ·ṭe·siṃ उदुक्खलेu·duk·kha·le कोट्टेत्वाkoṭ·ṭet·vā महावातेma·hā·vā·te ओपुनिं:o·pu·niṃ

     Araṇisahitaṁ dvidhā phālesiṁ, tidhā phālesiṁ, catudhā phālesiṁ, pañcadhā phālesiṁ, dasadhā phālesiṁ, satadhā phālesiṁ, sakalikaṁ sakalikaṁ akāsiṁ, sakalikaṁ sakalikaṁ karitvā udukkhale koṭṭesiṁ, udukkhale koṭṭetvā mahāvāte opuniṁ:

     (Pāli only)

447. 447

     “अप्पेवap·pe·va नामnā·ma अग्गिंag·giṃ अधिगच्छेय्यन्”ति।a·dhi·gac·chey·yan

     “appeva nāma aggiṁ adhigaccheyyan”ti.

     (Pāli only)

448. 448

     नेवाहंne·vā·haṃ अग्गिंag·giṃ अधिगच्छिन्’ति।a·dhi·gac·chin

     Nevāhaṁ aggiṁ adhigacchin’ti.

     (Pāli only)

449. 449

     अथa·tha खोkho तस्सtas·sa अग्गिकस्सag·gi·kas·sa जटिलस्सja·ṭi·las·sa एतदहोसि:e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho tassa aggikassa jaṭilassa etadahosi:

     Then the ascetic thought,

450. 450

     ‘यावyā·va बालोbā·lo अयंa·yaṃ दारकोdā·ra·ko अब्यत्तो,ab·yat·to कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma अयोनिसोa·yo·ni·so अग्गिंag·giṃ गवेसिस्सती’ति।ga·ve·sis·sa·tī

     ‘yāva bālo ayaṁ dārako abyatto, kathañhi nāma ayoniso aggiṁ gavesissatī’ti.

     ‘How foolish is this boy, how incompetent! For how on earth can he seek a fire so irrationally?’

451. 451

     तस्सtas·sa पेक्खमानस्सpek·kha·mā·nas·sa अरणिसहितंa·ra·ṇi·sa·hi·taṃ गहेत्वाga·het·vā अग्गिंag·giṃ निब्बत्तेत्वाnib·bat·tet·vā तंtaṃ दारकंdā·ra·kaṃ एतदवोच:e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Tassa pekkhamānassa araṇisahitaṁ gahetvā aggiṁ nibbattetvā taṁ dārakaṁ etadavoca:

     So while the boy looked on, he took a bundle of fire-sticks, lit the fire, and said,

452. 452

     ‘एवंe·vaṃ खो,kho तात,tā·ta अग्गिag·gi निब्बत्तेतब्बो।nib·bat·te·tab·bo

     ‘evaṁ kho, tāta, aggi nibbattetabbo.

     ‘Dear boy, this is how to light a fire.

453. 453

     नna त्वेवtve·va यथाya·thā त्वंtvaṃ बालोbā·lo अब्यत्तोab·yat·to अयोनिसोa·yo·ni·so अग्गिंag·giṃ गवेसी’ति।ga·ve·sī

     Na tveva yathā tvaṁ bālo abyatto ayoniso aggiṁ gavesī’ti.

     Not the foolish and incompetent way you sought it so irrationally.’

454. 454

     एवमेवe·va·me·va खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña बालोbā·lo अब्यत्तोab·yat·to अयोनिसोa·yo·ni·so परलोकंpa·ra·lo·kaṃ गवेसिस्ससि।ga·ve·sis·sa·si

     Evameva kho tvaṁ, rājañña, bālo abyatto ayoniso paralokaṁ gavesissasi.

     In the same way, chieftain, being foolish and incompetent, you seek the other world irrationally.

455. 455

     पटिनिस्सज्जेतं,pa·ṭi·nis·saj·je·taṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतं;diṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ पटिनिस्सज्जेतं,pa·ṭi·nis·saj·je·taṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतं।diṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ

     Paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ; paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ.

     Let go of this harmful misconception, chieftain, let go of it!

456. 456

     माmā तेte अहोसिa·ho·si दीघरत्तंdī·gha·rat·taṃ अहितायa·hi·tā·ya दुक्खाया”ति।duk·khā·yā

     Mā te ahosi dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyā”ti.

     Don’t create lasting harm and suffering for yourself!”

457. 457

     “किञ्चापिkiñ·cā·pi भवंbha·vaṃ कस्सपोkas·sa·po एवमाह,e·va·mā·ha अथa·tha खोkho नेवाहंne·vā·haṃ सक्कोमिsak·ko·mi इदंi·daṃ पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतंdiṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ पटिनिस्सज्जितुं।pa·ṭi·nis·saj·ji·tuṃ

     “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho nevāhaṁ sakkomi idaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ paṭinissajjituṁ.

     “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I’m not able to let go of that harmful misconception.

458. 458

     राजापिrā·jā·pi मंmaṃ पसेनदिpa·se·na·di कोसलोko·sa·lo जानातिjā·nā·ti तिरोराजानोपि:ti·ro·rā·jā·no·pi

     Rājāpi maṁ pasenadi kosalo jānāti tirorājānopi:

     King Pasenadi of Kosala knows my views, and so do foreign kings.

459. 459

     ‘पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño एवंवादीe·vaṃ·vā·dī एवंदिट्ठी:e·vaṃ·diṭ·ṭhī

     ‘pāyāsi rājañño evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhī:

     (Pāli only)

460. 460

     “इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको”’ति।vi·pā·ko

     “itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko”’ti.

     (Pāli only)

461. 461

     सचाहं,sa·cā·haṃ भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa इदंi·daṃ पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतंdiṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ पटिनिस्सज्जिस्सामि,pa·ṭi·nis·saj·jis·sā·mi भविस्सन्तिbha·vis·san·ti मेme वत्तारो:vat·tā·ro

     Sacāhaṁ, bho kassapa, idaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ paṭinissajjissāmi, bhavissanti me vattāro:

     If I let go of this harmful misconception, there will be some who say to me,

462. 462

     ‘यावyā·va बालोbā·lo पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño अब्यत्तोab·yat·to दुग्गहितगाही’ति।dug·ga·hi·ta·gā·hī

     ‘yāva bālo pāyāsi rājañño abyatto duggahitagāhī’ti.

     ‘How foolish is the chieftain Pāyāsi, how incompetent, that he should hold on to a mistake!’

463. 463

     कोपेनपिko·pe·na·pi नंnaṃ हरिस्सामि,ha·ris·sā·mi मक्खेनपिmak·khe·na·pi नंnaṃ हरिस्सामि,ha·ris·sā·mi पलासेनपिpa·lā·se·na·pi नंnaṃ हरिस्सामी”ति।ha·ris·sā·mī

     Kopenapi naṁ harissāmi, makkhenapi naṁ harissāmi, palāsenapi naṁ harissāmī”ti.

     I shall carry on with this view out of anger, contempt, and spite!”

464. 464

     2।11। द्वेसत्थवाहउपमाdve·sat·tha·vā·ha·u·pa·mā

     2.11. Dvesatthavāhaupamā

     2.11. The Simile of the Two Caravan Leaders

465. 465

     “तेनte·na हि,hi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña उपमंu·pa·maṃ तेte करिस्सामि।ka·ris·sā·mi

     “Tena hi, rājañña, upamaṁ te karissāmi.

     “Well then, chieftain, I shall give you a simile.

466. 466

     उपमायu·pa·mā·ya म्’इधेकच्चेm विञ्ञूviñ·ñū पुरिसाpu·ri·sā भासितस्सbhā·si·tas·sa अत्थंat·thaṃ आजानन्ति।ā·jā·nan·ti

     Upamāya m’idhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti.

     For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said.

467. 467

     भूतपुब्बं,bhū·ta·pub·baṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña महासकटसत्थोma·hā·sa·ka·ṭa·sat·tho सकटसहस्संsa·ka·ṭa·sa·has·saṃ पुरत्थिमाpu·rat·thi·mā जनपदाja·na·pa·dā पच्छिमंpac·chi·maṃ जनपदंja·na·pa·daṃ अगमासि।a·ga·mā·si

     Bhūtapubbaṁ, rājañña, mahāsakaṭasattho sakaṭasahassaṁ puratthimā janapadā pacchimaṁ janapadaṁ agamāsi.

     Once upon a time, a large caravan of a thousand wagons traveled from a country in the east to the west.

468. 468

     सोso येनye·na येनye·na गच्छि,gac·chi खिप्पंयेवkhip·paṃ·ye·va परियादियतिpa·ri·yā·di·ya·ti तिणकट्ठोदकंti·ṇa·kaṭ·ṭho·da·kaṃ हरितकपण्णं।ha·ri·ta·ka·paṇ·ṇaṃ

     So yena yena gacchi, khippaṁyeva pariyādiyati tiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ haritakapaṇṇaṁ.

     Wherever they went they quickly used up the grass, wood, water, and the green foliage.

469. 469

     तस्मिंtas·miṃ खोkho पनpa·na सत्थेsat·the द्वेdve सत्थवाहाsat·tha·vā·hā अहेसुंa·he·suṃ एकोe·ko पञ्चन्नंpañ·can·naṃ सकटसतानं,sa·ka·ṭa·sa·tā·naṃ एकोe·ko पञ्चन्नंpañ·can·naṃ सकटसतानं।sa·ka·ṭa·sa·tā·naṃ

     Tasmiṁ kho pana satthe dve satthavāhā ahesuṁ eko pañcannaṁ sakaṭasatānaṁ, eko pañcannaṁ sakaṭasatānaṁ.

     Now, that caravan had two leaders, each in charge of five hundred wagons.

470. 470

     अथa·tha खोkho तेसंte·saṃ सत्थवाहानंsat·tha·vā·hā·naṃ एतदहोसि:e·ta·da·ho·si

     Atha kho tesaṁ satthavāhānaṁ etadahosi:

     They thought,

471. 471

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ खोkho महासकटसत्थोma·hā·sa·ka·ṭa·sat·tho सकटसहस्सं;sa·ka·ṭa·sa·has·saṃ

     ‘ayaṁ kho mahāsakaṭasattho sakaṭasahassaṁ;

     ‘This is a large caravan of a thousand wagons.

472. 472

     तेte मयंma·yaṃ येनye·na येनye·na गच्छाम,gac·chā·ma खिप्पमेवkhip·pa·me·va परियादियतिpa·ri·yā·di·ya·ti तिणकट्ठोदकंti·ṇa·kaṭ·ṭho·da·kaṃ हरितकपण्णं।ha·ri·ta·ka·paṇ·ṇaṃ

     te mayaṁ yena yena gacchāma, khippameva pariyādiyati tiṇakaṭṭhodakaṁ haritakapaṇṇaṁ.

     Wherever we go we quickly use up the grass, wood, water, and the green foliage.

473. 473

     यन्नूनyan·nū·na मयंma·yaṃ इमंi·maṃ सत्थंsat·thaṃ द्विधाdvi·dhā विभजेय्याम—vi·bha·jey·yā·ma

     Yannūna mayaṁ imaṁ satthaṁ dvidhā vibhajeyyāma—

     Why don’t we split the caravan in two halves?’

474. 474

     एकतोe·ka·to पञ्चpañ·ca सकटसतानिsa·ka·ṭa·sa·tā·ni एकतोe·ka·to पञ्चpañ·ca सकटसतानी’ति।sa·ka·ṭa·sa·tā·nī

     ekato pañca sakaṭasatāni ekato pañca sakaṭasatānī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

475. 475

     तेte तंtaṃ सत्थंsat·thaṃ द्विधाdvi·dhā विभजिंसुvi·bha·jiṃ·su एकतोe·ka·to पञ्चpañ·ca सकटसतानि,sa·ka·ṭa·sa·tā·ni एकतोe·ka·to पञ्चpañ·ca सकटसतानि।sa·ka·ṭa·sa·tā·ni

     Te taṁ satthaṁ dvidhā vibhajiṁsu ekato pañca sakaṭasatāni, ekato pañca sakaṭasatāni.

     So that’s what they did.

476. 476

     एकोe·ko सत्थवाहोsat·tha·vā·ho बहुंba·huṃ तिणञ्चti·ṇañ·ca कट्ठञ्चkaṭ·ṭhañ·ca उदकञ्चu·da·kañ·ca आरोपेत्वाā·ro·pet·vā सत्थंsat·thaṃ पयापेसि।pa·yā·pe·si

     Eko satthavāho bahuṁ tiṇañca kaṭṭhañca udakañca āropetvā satthaṁ payāpesi.

     One caravan leader, having prepared much grass, wood, and water, started the caravan.

477. 477

     द्वीहतीहपयातोdvī·ha·tī·ha·pa·yā·to खोkho पनpa·na सोso सत्थोsat·tho अद्दसad·da·sa पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ काळंkā·ḷaṃ लोहितक्खंlo·hi·tak·khaṃ सन्नद्धकलापंsan·nad·dha·ka·lā·paṃ कुमुदमालिंku·mu·da·mā·liṃ अल्लवत्थंal·la·vat·thaṃ अल्लकेसंal·la·ke·saṃ कद्दममक्खितेहिkad·da·ma·mak·khi·te·hi चक्केहिcak·ke·hi भद्रेनbhad·re·na रथेनra·the·na पटिपथंpa·ṭi·pa·thaṃ आगच्छन्तं,ā·gac·chan·taṃ दिस्वाdis·vā एतदवोच:e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Dvīhatīhapayāto kho pana so sattho addasa purisaṁ kāḷaṁ lohitakkhaṁ sannaddhakalāpaṁ kumudamāliṁ allavatthaṁ allakesaṁ kaddamamakkhitehi cakkehi bhadrena rathena paṭipathaṁ āgacchantaṁ, disvā etadavoca:

     After two or three days’ journey he saw a dark man with red eyes coming the other way in a donkey cart with muddy wheels. He was armored with a quiver and wreathed with yellow lotus, his clothes and hair all wet. Seeing him, he said,

478. 478

     ‘कुतो,ku·to भो,bho आगच्छसी’ति?ā·gac·cha·sī

     ‘kuto, bho, āgacchasī’ti?

     ‘Worthy sir, where do you come from?’

479. 479

     ‘अमुकम्हाa·mu·kam·hā जनपदा’ति।ja·na·pa·dā

     ‘Amukamhā janapadā’ti.

     ‘From such-and-such a country.’

480. 480

     ‘कुहिंku·hiṃ गमिस्ससी’ति?ga·mis·sa·sī

     ‘Kuhiṁ gamissasī’ti?

     ‘And where are you going?’

481. 481

     ‘अमुकंa·mu·kaṃ नामnā·ma जनपदन्’ति।ja·na·pa·dan

     ‘Amukaṁ nāma janapadan’ti.

     ‘To the country named such-and-such.’

482. 482

     ‘कच्चि,kac·ci भो,bho पुरतोpu·ra·to कन्तारेkan·tā·re महामेघोma·hā·me·gho अभिप्पवुट्ठो’ति?a·bhip·pa·vuṭ·ṭho

     ‘Kacci, bho, purato kantāre mahāmegho abhippavuṭṭho’ti?

     ‘But has there been much rain in the desert up ahead?’

483. 483

     ‘एवं,e·vaṃ भो,bho पुरतोpu·ra·to कन्तारेkan·tā·re महामेघोma·hā·me·gho अभिप्पवुट्ठो,a·bhip·pa·vuṭ·ṭho आसित्तोदकानिā·sit·to·da·kā·ni वटुमानि,va·ṭu·mā·ni बहुba·hu तिणञ्चti·ṇañ·ca कट्ठञ्चkaṭ·ṭhañ·ca उदकञ्च।u·da·kañ·ca

     ‘Evaṁ, bho, purato kantāre mahāmegho abhippavuṭṭho, āsittodakāni vaṭumāni, bahu tiṇañca kaṭṭhañca udakañca.

     ‘Indeed there has, worthy sir. The tracks are sprinkled with water, and there is much grass, wood, and water.

484. 484

     छड्डेथ,chaḍ·ḍe·tha भो,bho पुराणानिpu·rā·ṇā·ni तिणानिti·ṇā·ni कट्ठानिkaṭ·ṭhā·ni उदकानि,u·da·kā·ni लहुभारेहिla·hu·bhā·re·hi सकटेहिsa·ka·ṭe·hi सीघंsī·ghaṃ सीघंsī·ghaṃ गच्छथ,gac·cha·tha माmā योग्गानिyog·gā·ni किलमित्था’ति।ki·la·mit·thā

     Chaḍḍetha, bho, purāṇāni tiṇāni kaṭṭhāni udakāni, lahubhārehi sakaṭehi sīghaṁ sīghaṁ gacchatha, mā yoggāni kilamitthā’ti.

     Discard your grass, wood, and water. Your wagons will move swiftly when lightly-laden, so don’t tire your draught teams.’

485. 485

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso सत्थवाहोsat·tha·vā·ho सत्थिकेsat·thi·ke आमन्तेसि:ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho so satthavāho satthike āmantesi:

     So the caravan leader addressed his drivers,

486. 486

     ‘अयं,a·yaṃ भो,bho पुरिसोpu·ri·so एवमाह:e·va·mā·ha

     ‘ayaṁ, bho, puriso evamāha:

     ‘This man says that

487. 487

     “पुरतोpu·ra·to कन्तारेkan·tā·re महामेघोma·hā·me·gho अभिप्पवुट्ठो,a·bhip·pa·vuṭ·ṭho आसित्तोदकानिā·sit·to·da·kā·ni वटुमानि,va·ṭu·mā·ni बहुba·hu तिणञ्चti·ṇañ·ca कट्ठञ्चkaṭ·ṭhañ·ca उदकञ्च।u·da·kañ·ca

     “purato kantāre mahāmegho abhippavuṭṭho, āsittodakāni vaṭumāni, bahu tiṇañca kaṭṭhañca udakañca.

     there has been much rain in the desert up ahead.

488. 488

     छड्डेथ,chaḍ·ḍe·tha भो,bho पुराणानिpu·rā·ṇā·ni तिणानिti·ṇā·ni कट्ठानिkaṭ·ṭhā·ni उदकानि,u·da·kā·ni लहुभारेहिla·hu·bhā·re·hi सकटेहिsa·ka·ṭe·hi सीघंsī·ghaṃ सीघंsī·ghaṃ गच्छथ,gac·cha·tha माmā योग्गानिyog·gā·ni किलमित्था”ति।ki·la·mit·thā

     Chaḍḍetha, bho, purāṇāni tiṇāni kaṭṭhāni udakāni, lahubhārehi sakaṭehi sīghaṁ sīghaṁ gacchatha, mā yoggāni kilamitthā”ti.

     He advises us to discard the grass, wood, and water. The wagons will move swiftly when lightly-laden, and won’t tire our draught teams.

489. 489

     छड्डेथ,chaḍ·ḍe·tha भो,bho पुराणानिpu·rā·ṇā·ni तिणानिti·ṇā·ni कट्ठानिkaṭ·ṭhā·ni उदकानि,u·da·kā·ni लहुभारेहिla·hu·bhā·re·hi सकटेहिsa·ka·ṭe·hi सत्थंsat·thaṃ पयापेथा’ति।pa·yā·pe·thā

     Chaḍḍetha, bho, purāṇāni tiṇāni kaṭṭhāni udakāni, lahubhārehi sakaṭehi satthaṁ payāpethā’ti.

     So let’s discard the grass, wood, and water and restart the caravan with lightly-laden wagons.’

490. 490

     ‘एवं,e·vaṃ भो’तिbho खोkho तेte सत्थिकाsat·thi·kā तस्सtas·sa सत्थवाहस्सsat·tha·vā·has·sa पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā छड्डेत्वाchaḍ·ḍet·vā पुराणानिpu·rā·ṇā·ni तिणानिti·ṇā·ni कट्ठानिkaṭ·ṭhā·ni उदकानिu·da·kā·ni लहुभारेहिla·hu·bhā·re·hi सकटेहिsa·ka·ṭe·hi सत्थंsat·thaṃ पयापेसुं।pa·yā·pe·suṃ

     ‘Evaṁ, bho’ti kho te satthikā tassa satthavāhassa paṭissutvā chaḍḍetvā purāṇāni tiṇāni kaṭṭhāni udakāni lahubhārehi sakaṭehi satthaṁ payāpesuṁ.

     ‘Yes, worthy sir,’ the drivers replied, and that’s what they did.

491. 491

     तेte पठमेपिpa·ṭha·me·pi सत्थवासेsat·tha·vā·se नna अद्दसंसुad·da·saṃ·su तिणंti·ṇaṃ वाvā कट्ठंkaṭ·ṭhaṃ वाvā उदकंu·da·kaṃ वा।vā

     Te paṭhamepi satthavāse na addasaṁsu tiṇaṁ vā kaṭṭhaṁ vā udakaṁ vā.

     But in the caravan’s first campsite they saw no grass, wood, or water.

492. 492

     दुतियेपिdu·ti·ye·pi सत्थवासेsat·tha·vā·se …

     Dutiyepi satthavāse …

     And in the second,

493. 493

     ततियेपिta·ti·ye·pi सत्थवासेsat·tha·vā·se …

     tatiyepi satthavāse …

     third,

494. 494

     चतुत्थेपिca·tut·the·pi सत्थवासेsat·tha·vā·se …

     catutthepi satthavāse …

     fourth,

495. 495

     पञ्चमेपिpañ·ca·me·pi सत्थवासेsat·tha·vā·se …

     pañcamepi satthavāse …

     fifth,

496. 496

     छट्ठेपिchaṭ·ṭhe·pi सत्थवासेsat·tha·vā·se …

     chaṭṭhepi satthavāse …

     sixth,

497. 497

     सत्तमेपिsat·ta·me·pi सत्थवासेsat·tha·vā·se नna अद्दसंसुad·da·saṃ·su तिणंti·ṇaṃ वाvā कट्ठंkaṭ·ṭhaṃ वाvā उदकंu·da·kaṃ वा।vā

     sattamepi satthavāse na addasaṁsu tiṇaṁ vā kaṭṭhaṁ vā udakaṁ vā.

     and seventh campsites they saw no grass, wood, or water.

498. 498

     सब्बेवsab·be·va अनयब्यसनंa·na·yab·ya·sa·naṃ आपज्जिंसु।ā·paj·jiṃ·su

     Sabbeva anayabyasanaṁ āpajjiṁsu.

     And all fell to ruin and disaster.

499. 499

     येye चca तस्मिंtas·miṃ सत्थेsat·the अहेसुंa·he·suṃ मनुस्साma·nus·sā वाvā पसूpa·sū वा,vā सब्बेsab·be सोso यक्खोyak·kho अमनुस्सोa·ma·nus·so भक्खेसि।bhak·khe·si

     Ye ca tasmiṁ satthe ahesuṁ manussā vā pasū vā, sabbe so yakkho amanusso bhakkhesi.

     And the men and beasts in that caravan were all devoured by that non-human spirit.

500. 500

     अट्ठिकानेवaṭ·ṭhi·kā·ne·va सेसानि।se·sā·ni

     Aṭṭhikāneva sesāni.

     Only their bones were left over.

501. 501

     यदाya·dā अञ्ञासिañ·ñā·si दुतियोdu·ti·yo सत्थवाहो:sat·tha·vā·ho

     Yadā aññāsi dutiyo satthavāho:

     Now, when the second caravan leader knew that

502. 502

     ‘बहुनिक्खन्तोba·hu·nik·khan·to खो,kho भो,bho दानिdā·ni सोso सत्थो’तिsat·tho बहुंba·huṃ तिणञ्चti·ṇañ·ca कट्ठञ्चkaṭ·ṭhañ·ca उदकञ्चu·da·kañ·ca आरोपेत्वाā·ro·pet·vā सत्थंsat·thaṃ पयापेसि।pa·yā·pe·si

     ‘bahunikkhanto kho, bho, dāni so sattho’ti bahuṁ tiṇañca kaṭṭhañca udakañca āropetvā satthaṁ payāpesi.

     the first caravan was well underway, he prepared much grass, wood, and water and started the caravan.

503. 503

     द्वीहतीहपयातोdvī·ha·tī·ha·pa·yā·to खोkho पनpa·na सोso सत्थोsat·tho अद्दसad·da·sa पुरिसंpu·ri·saṃ काळंkā·ḷaṃ लोहितक्खंlo·hi·tak·khaṃ सन्नद्धकलापंsan·nad·dha·ka·lā·paṃ कुमुदमालिंku·mu·da·mā·liṃ अल्लवत्थंal·la·vat·thaṃ अल्लकेसंal·la·ke·saṃ कद्दममक्खितेहिkad·da·ma·mak·khi·te·hi चक्केहिcak·ke·hi भद्रेनbhad·re·na रथेनra·the·na पटिपथंpa·ṭi·pa·thaṃ आगच्छन्तं,ā·gac·chan·taṃ दिस्वाdis·vā एतदवोच:e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Dvīhatīhapayāto kho pana so sattho addasa purisaṁ kāḷaṁ lohitakkhaṁ sannaddhakalāpaṁ kumudamāliṁ allavatthaṁ allakesaṁ kaddamamakkhitehi cakkehi bhadrena rathena paṭipathaṁ āgacchantaṁ, disvā etadavoca:

     After two or three days’ journey he saw a dark man with red eyes coming the other way in a donkey cart with muddy wheels. He was armored with a quiver and wreathed with yellow lotus, his clothes and hair all wet. Seeing him, he said,

504. 504

     ‘कुतो,ku·to भो,bho आगच्छसी’ति?ā·gac·cha·sī

     ‘kuto, bho, āgacchasī’ti?

     ‘Worthy sir, where do you come from?’

505. 505

     ‘अमुकम्हाa·mu·kam·hā जनपदा’ति।ja·na·pa·dā

     ‘Amukamhā janapadā’ti.

     ‘From such-and-such a country.’

506. 506

     ‘कुहिंku·hiṃ गमिस्ससी’ति?ga·mis·sa·sī

     ‘Kuhiṁ gamissasī’ti?

     ‘And where are you going?’

507. 507

     ‘अमुकंa·mu·kaṃ नामnā·ma जनपदन्’ति।ja·na·pa·dan

     ‘Amukaṁ nāma janapadan’ti.

     ‘To the country named such-and-such.’

508. 508

     ‘कच्चि,kac·ci भो,bho पुरतोpu·ra·to कन्तारेkan·tā·re महामेघोma·hā·me·gho अभिप्पवुट्ठो’ति?a·bhip·pa·vuṭ·ṭho

     ‘Kacci, bho, purato kantāre mahāmegho abhippavuṭṭho’ti?

     ‘But has there been much rain in the desert up ahead?’

509. 509

     ‘एवं,e·vaṃ भो,bho पुरतोpu·ra·to कन्तारेkan·tā·re महामेघोma·hā·me·gho अभिप्पवुट्ठो।a·bhip·pa·vuṭ·ṭho आसित्तोदकानिā·sit·to·da·kā·ni वटुमानि,va·ṭu·mā·ni बहुba·hu तिणञ्चti·ṇañ·ca कट्ठञ्चkaṭ·ṭhañ·ca उदकञ्च।u·da·kañ·ca

     ‘Evaṁ, bho, purato kantāre mahāmegho abhippavuṭṭho. Āsittodakāni vaṭumāni, bahu tiṇañca kaṭṭhañca udakañca.

     ‘Indeed there has, worthy sir. The tracks are sprinkled with water, and there is much grass, wood, and water.

510. 510

     छड्डेथ,chaḍ·ḍe·tha भो,bho पुराणानिpu·rā·ṇā·ni तिणानिti·ṇā·ni कट्ठानिkaṭ·ṭhā·ni उदकानि,u·da·kā·ni लहुभारेहिla·hu·bhā·re·hi सकटेहिsa·ka·ṭe·hi सीघंsī·ghaṃ सीघंsī·ghaṃ गच्छथ,gac·cha·tha माmā योग्गानिyog·gā·ni किलमित्था’ति।ki·la·mit·thā

     Chaḍḍetha, bho, purāṇāni tiṇāni kaṭṭhāni udakāni, lahubhārehi sakaṭehi sīghaṁ sīghaṁ gacchatha, mā yoggāni kilamitthā’ti.

     Discard your grass, wood, and water. Your wagons will move swiftly when lightly-laden, so don’t tire your draught teams.’

511. 511

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso सत्थवाहोsat·tha·vā·ho सत्थिकेsat·thi·ke आमन्तेसि:ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho so satthavāho satthike āmantesi:

     So the caravan leader addressed his drivers,

512. 512

     ‘अयं,a·yaṃ भो,bho पुरिसोpu·ri·so एवमाह:e·va·mā·ha

     ‘ayaṁ, bho, puriso evamāha:

     ‘This man says that

513. 513

     “पुरतोpu·ra·to कन्तारेkan·tā·re महामेघोma·hā·me·gho अभिप्पवुट्ठो,a·bhip·pa·vuṭ·ṭho आसित्तोदकानिā·sit·to·da·kā·ni वटुमानि,va·ṭu·mā·ni बहुba·hu तिणञ्चti·ṇañ·ca कट्ठञ्चkaṭ·ṭhañ·ca उदकञ्च।u·da·kañ·ca

     “purato kantāre mahāmegho abhippavuṭṭho, āsittodakāni vaṭumāni, bahu tiṇañca kaṭṭhañca udakañca.

     there has been much rain in the desert up ahead.

514. 514

     छड्डेथ,chaḍ·ḍe·tha भो,bho पुराणानिpu·rā·ṇā·ni तिणानिti·ṇā·ni कट्ठानिkaṭ·ṭhā·ni उदकानि,u·da·kā·ni लहुभारेहिla·hu·bhā·re·hi सकटेहिsa·ka·ṭe·hi सीघंsī·ghaṃ सीघंsī·ghaṃ गच्छथ;gac·cha·tha माmā योग्गानिyog·gā·ni किलमित्था”ति।ki·la·mit·thā

     Chaḍḍetha, bho, purāṇāni tiṇāni kaṭṭhāni udakāni, lahubhārehi sakaṭehi sīghaṁ sīghaṁ gacchatha; mā yoggāni kilamitthā”ti.

     He advises us to discard the grass, wood, and water. The wagons will move swiftly when lightly-laden, and won’t tire our draught teams.

515. 515

     अयंa·yaṃ भोbho पुरिसोpu·ri·so नेवne·va अम्हाकंam·hā·kaṃ मित्तो,mit·to नna ञातिसालोहितो,ñā·ti·sā·lo·hi·to कथंka·thaṃ मयंma·yaṃ इमस्सi·mas·sa सद्धायsad·dhā·ya गमिस्साम।ga·mis·sā·ma

     Ayaṁ bho puriso neva amhākaṁ mitto, na ñātisālohito, kathaṁ mayaṁ imassa saddhāya gamissāma.

     But this person is neither our friend nor relative. How can we proceed out of trust in him?

516. 516

     नna वोvo छड्डेतब्बानिchaḍ·ḍe·tab·bā·ni पुराणानिpu·rā·ṇā·ni तिणानिti·ṇā·ni कट्ठानिkaṭ·ṭhā·ni उदकानि,u·da·kā·ni यथाभतेनya·thā·bha·te·na भण्डेनbhaṇ·ḍe·na सत्थंsat·thaṃ पयापेथ।pa·yā·pe·tha

     Na vo chaḍḍetabbāni purāṇāni tiṇāni kaṭṭhāni udakāni, yathābhatena bhaṇḍena satthaṁ payāpetha.

     We shouldn’t discard any grass, wood, or water, but continue with our goods as laden.

517. 517

     नna नोno पुराणंpu·rā·ṇaṃ छड्डेस्सामा’ति।chaḍ·ḍes·sā·mā

     Na no purāṇaṁ chaḍḍessāmā’ti.

     We shall not discard any old stock.’

518. 518

     ‘एवं,e·vaṃ भो’तिbho खोkho तेte सत्थिकाsat·thi·kā तस्सtas·sa सत्थवाहस्सsat·tha·vā·has·sa पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā यथाभतेनya·thā·bha·te·na भण्डेनbhaṇ·ḍe·na सत्थंsat·thaṃ पयापेसुं।pa·yā·pe·suṃ

     ‘Evaṁ, bho’ti kho te satthikā tassa satthavāhassa paṭissutvā yathābhatena bhaṇḍena satthaṁ payāpesuṁ.

     ‘Yes, worthy sir,’ the drivers replied, and they restarted the caravan with the goods as laden.

519. 519

     तेte पठमेपिpa·ṭha·me·pi सत्थवासेsat·tha·vā·se नna अद्दसंसुad·da·saṃ·su तिणंti·ṇaṃ वाvā कट्ठंkaṭ·ṭhaṃ वाvā उदकंu·da·kaṃ वा।vā

     Te paṭhamepi satthavāse na addasaṁsu tiṇaṁ vā kaṭṭhaṁ vā udakaṁ vā.

     And in the caravan’s first campsite they saw no grass, wood, or water.

520. 520

     दुतियेपिdu·ti·ye·pi सत्थवासेsat·tha·vā·se …

     Dutiyepi satthavāse …

     And in the second,

521. 521

     ततियेपिta·ti·ye·pi सत्थवासेsat·tha·vā·se …

     tatiyepi satthavāse …

     third,

522. 522

     चतुत्थेपिca·tut·the·pi सत्थवासेsat·tha·vā·se …

     catutthepi satthavāse …

     fourth,

523. 523

     पञ्चमेपिpañ·ca·me·pi सत्थवासेsat·tha·vā·se …

     pañcamepi satthavāse …

     fifth,

524. 524

     छट्ठेपिchaṭ·ṭhe·pi सत्थवासेsat·tha·vā·se …

     chaṭṭhepi satthavāse …

     sixth,

525. 525

     सत्तमेपिsat·ta·me·pi सत्थवासेsat·tha·vā·se नna अद्दसंसुad·da·saṃ·su तिणंti·ṇaṃ वाvā कट्ठंkaṭ·ṭhaṃ वाvā उदकंu·da·kaṃ वा।vā

     sattamepi satthavāse na addasaṁsu tiṇaṁ vā kaṭṭhaṁ vā udakaṁ vā.

     and seventh campsites they saw no grass, wood, or water.

526. 526

     तञ्चtañ·ca सत्थंsat·thaṃ अद्दसंसुad·da·saṃ·su अनयब्यसनंa·na·yab·ya·sa·naṃ आपन्नं।ā·pan·naṃ

     Tañca satthaṁ addasaṁsu anayabyasanaṁ āpannaṁ.

     And they saw the other caravan that had come to ruin.

527. 527

     येye चca तस्मिंtas·miṃ सत्थेपिsat·the·pi अहेसुंa·he·suṃ मनुस्साma·nus·sā वाvā पसूpa·sū वा,vā तेसञ्चte·sañ·ca अट्ठिकानेवaṭ·ṭhi·kā·ne·va अद्दसंसुad·da·saṃ·su तेनte·na यक्खेनyak·khe·na अमनुस्सेनa·ma·nus·se·na भक्खितानं।bhak·khi·tā·naṃ

     Ye ca tasmiṁ satthepi ahesuṁ manussā vā pasū vā, tesañca aṭṭhikāneva addasaṁsu tena yakkhena amanussena bhakkhitānaṁ.

     And they saw the bones of the men and beasts who had been devoured by that non-human spirit.

528. 528

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso सत्थवाहोsat·tha·vā·ho सत्थिकेsat·thi·ke आमन्तेसि:ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho so satthavāho satthike āmantesi:

     So the caravan leader addressed his drivers,

529. 529

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ खो,kho भो,bho सत्थोsat·tho अनयब्यसनंa·na·yab·ya·sa·naṃ आपन्नो,ā·pan·no यथाya·thā तंtaṃ तेनte·na बालेनbā·le·na सत्थवाहेनsat·tha·vā·he·na परिणायकेन।pa·ri·ṇā·ya·ke·na

     ‘ayaṁ kho, bho, sattho anayabyasanaṁ āpanno, yathā taṁ tena bālena satthavāhena pariṇāyakena.

     ‘This caravan came to ruin, as happens when guided by a foolish caravan leader.

530. 530

     तेनte·na हि,hi भो,bho यानम्हाकंyā·nam·hā·kaṃ सत्थेsat·the अप्पसारानिap·pa·sā·rā·ni पणियानि,pa·ṇi·yā·ni तानिtā·ni छड्डेत्वा,chaḍ·ḍet·vā यानिyā·ni इमस्मिंi·mas·miṃ सत्थेsat·the महासारानिma·hā·sā·rā·ni पणियानि,pa·ṇi·yā·ni तानिtā·ni आदियथा’ति।ā·di·ya·thā

     Tena hi, bho, yānamhākaṁ satthe appasārāni paṇiyāni, tāni chaḍḍetvā, yāni imasmiṁ satthe mahāsārāni paṇiyāni, tāni ādiyathā’ti.

     Well then, worthy sir, discard any of our merchandise that’s of little value, and take what’s valuable from this caravan.’

531. 531

     ‘एवं,e·vaṃ भो’तिbho खोkho तेte सत्थिकाsat·thi·kā तस्सtas·sa सत्थवाहस्सsat·tha·vā·has·sa पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā यानिyā·ni सकस्मिंsa·kas·miṃ सत्थेsat·the अप्पसारानिap·pa·sā·rā·ni पणियानि,pa·ṇi·yā·ni तानिtā·ni छड्डेत्वाchaḍ·ḍet·vā यानिyā·ni तस्मिंtas·miṃ सत्थेsat·the महासारानिma·hā·sā·rā·ni पणियानि,pa·ṇi·yā·ni तानिtā·ni आदियित्वाā·di·yit·vā सोत्थिनाsot·thi·nā तंtaṃ कन्तारंkan·tā·raṃ नित्थरिंसु,nit·tha·riṃ·su यथाya·thā तंtaṃ पण्डितेनpaṇ·ḍi·te·na सत्थवाहेनsat·tha·vā·he·na परिणायकेन।pa·ri·ṇā·ya·ke·na

     ‘Evaṁ, bho’ti kho te satthikā tassa satthavāhassa paṭissutvā yāni sakasmiṁ satthe appasārāni paṇiyāni, tāni chaḍḍetvā yāni tasmiṁ satthe mahāsārāni paṇiyāni, tāni ādiyitvā sotthinā taṁ kantāraṁ nitthariṁsu, yathā taṁ paṇḍitena satthavāhena pariṇāyakena.

     ‘Yes, worthy sir’ replied the drivers, and that’s what they did. They crossed over the desert safely, as happens when guided by an astute caravan leader.

532. 532

     एवमेवe·va·me·va खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña बालोbā·lo अब्यत्तोab·yat·to अनयब्यसनंa·na·yab·ya·sa·naṃ आपज्जिस्ससिā·paj·jis·sa·si अयोनिसोa·yo·ni·so परलोकंpa·ra·lo·kaṃ गवेसन्तो,ga·ve·san·to सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi सोso पुरिमोpu·ri·mo सत्थवाहो।sat·tha·vā·ho

     Evameva kho tvaṁ, rājañña, bālo abyatto anayabyasanaṁ āpajjissasi ayoniso paralokaṁ gavesanto, seyyathāpi so purimo satthavāho.

     In the same way, chieftain, being foolish and incompetent, you will come to ruin seeking the other world irrationally, like the first caravan leader.

533. 533

     येपिye·pi तवta·va सोतब्बंso·tab·baṃ सद्धातब्बंsad·dhā·tab·baṃ मञ्ञिस्सन्ति,mañ·ñis·san·ti तेपिte·pi अनयब्यसनंa·na·yab·ya·sa·naṃ आपज्जिस्सन्ति,ā·paj·jis·san·ti सेय्यथापिsey·ya·thā·pi तेte सत्थिका।sat·thi·kā

     Yepi tava sotabbaṁ saddhātabbaṁ maññissanti, tepi anayabyasanaṁ āpajjissanti, seyyathāpi te satthikā.

     And those who think you’re worth listening to and trusting will also come to ruin, like the drivers.

534. 534

     पटिनिस्सज्जेतं,pa·ṭi·nis·saj·je·taṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतं;diṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ पटिनिस्सज्जेतं,pa·ṭi·nis·saj·je·taṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतं।diṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ

     Paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ; paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ.

     Let go of this harmful misconception, chieftain, let go of it!

535. 535

     माmā तेte अहोसिa·ho·si दीघरत्तंdī·gha·rat·taṃ अहितायa·hi·tā·ya दुक्खाया”ति।duk·khā·yā

     Mā te ahosi dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyā”ti.

     Don’t create lasting harm and suffering for yourself!”

536. 536

     “किञ्चापिkiñ·cā·pi भवंbha·vaṃ कस्सपोkas·sa·po एवमाह,e·va·mā·ha अथa·tha खोkho नेवाहंne·vā·haṃ सक्कोमिsak·ko·mi इदंi·daṃ पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतंdiṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ पटिनिस्सज्जितुं।pa·ṭi·nis·saj·ji·tuṃ

     “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho nevāhaṁ sakkomi idaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ paṭinissajjituṁ.

     “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I’m not able to let go of that harmful misconception.

537. 537

     राजापिrā·jā·pi मंmaṃ पसेनदिpa·se·na·di कोसलोko·sa·lo जानातिjā·nā·ti तिरोराजानोपि:ti·ro·rā·jā·no·pi ‘पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño एवंवादीe·vaṃ·vā·dī एवंदिट्ठी:e·vaṃ·diṭ·ṭhī

     Rājāpi maṁ pasenadi kosalo jānāti tirorājānopi: ‘pāyāsi rājañño evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhī:

     King Pasenadi of Kosala knows my views, and so do foreign kings.

538. 538

     “इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोकोlo·ko …पे…pe विपाको”’ति।vi·pā·ko

     “itipi natthi paro loko …pe… vipāko”’ti.

     (Pāli only)

539. 539

     सचाहं,sa·cā·haṃ भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa इदंi·daṃ पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतंdiṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ पटिनिस्सज्जिस्सामि,pa·ṭi·nis·saj·jis·sā·mi भविस्सन्तिbha·vis·san·ti मेme वत्तारो:vat·tā·ro

     Sacāhaṁ, bho kassapa, idaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ paṭinissajjissāmi, bhavissanti me vattāro:

     (Pāli only)

540. 540

     ‘यावyā·va बालोbā·lo पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञो,rā·jañ·ño अब्यत्तोab·yat·to दुग्गहितगाही’ति।dug·ga·hi·ta·gā·hī

     ‘yāva bālo pāyāsi rājañño, abyatto duggahitagāhī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

541. 541

     कोपेनपिko·pe·na·pi नंnaṃ हरिस्सामि,ha·ris·sā·mi मक्खेनपिmak·khe·na·pi नंnaṃ हरिस्सामि,ha·ris·sā·mi पलासेनपिpa·lā·se·na·pi नंnaṃ हरिस्सामी”ति।ha·ris·sā·mī

     Kopenapi naṁ harissāmi, makkhenapi naṁ harissāmi, palāsenapi naṁ harissāmī”ti.

     I shall carry on with this view out of anger, contempt, and spite!”

542. 542

     2।12। गूथभारिकउपमाgū·tha·bhā·ri·ka·u·pa·mā

     2.12. Gūthabhārikaupamā

     2.12. The Simile of the Dung-Carrier

543. 543

     “तेनte·na हि,hi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña उपमंu·pa·maṃ तेte करिस्सामि।ka·ris·sā·mi

     “Tena hi, rājañña, upamaṁ te karissāmi.

     “Well then, chieftain, I shall give you a simile.

544. 544

     उपमायu·pa·mā·ya म्’इधेकच्चेm विञ्ञूviñ·ñū पुरिसाpu·ri·sā भासितस्सbhā·si·tas·sa अत्थंat·thaṃ आजानन्ति।ā·jā·nan·ti

     Upamāya m’idhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti.

     For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said.

545. 545

     भूतपुब्बं,bhū·ta·pub·baṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro सूकरपोसकोsū·ka·ra·po·sa·ko पुरिसोpu·ri·so सकम्हाsa·kam·hā गामाgā·mā अञ्ञंañ·ñaṃ गामंgā·maṃ अगमासि।a·ga·mā·si

     Bhūtapubbaṁ, rājañña, aññataro sūkaraposako puriso sakamhā gāmā aññaṁ gāmaṁ agamāsi.

     Once upon a time, a certain swineherd went from his own village to another village.

546. 546

     तत्थtat·tha अद्दसad·da·sa पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ सुक्खगूथंsuk·kha·gū·thaṃ छड्डितं।chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ

     Tattha addasa pahūtaṁ sukkhagūthaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ.

     There he saw a large pile of dry dung abandoned.

547. 547

     दिस्वानस्सdis·vā·nas·sa एतदहोसि:e·ta·da·ho·si

     Disvānassa etadahosi:

     He thought,

548. 548

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ खोkho पहूतोpa·hū·to सुक्खगूथोsuk·kha·gū·tho छड्डितो,chaḍ·ḍi·to ममma·ma चca सूकरभत्तं;sū·ka·ra·bhat·taṃ

     ‘ayaṁ kho pahūto sukkhagūtho chaḍḍito, mama ca sūkarabhattaṁ;

     ‘This pile of dry dung can serve as food for my pigs.

549. 549

     यन्नूनाहंyan·nū·nā·haṃ इतोi·to सुक्खगूथंsuk·kha·gū·thaṃ हरेय्यन्’ति।ha·rey·yan

     yannūnāhaṁ ito sukkhagūthaṁ hareyyan’ti.

     Why don’t I carry it off?’

550. 550

     सोso उत्तरासङ्गंut·ta·rā·saṅ·gaṃ पत्थरित्वाpat·tha·rit·vā पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ सुक्खगूथंsuk·kha·gū·thaṃ आकिरित्वाā·ki·rit·vā भण्डिकंbhaṇ·ḍi·kaṃ बन्धित्वाban·dhit·vā सीसेsī·se उब्बाहेत्वाub·bā·het·vā अगमासि।a·ga·mā·si

     So uttarāsaṅgaṁ pattharitvā pahūtaṁ sukkhagūthaṁ ākiritvā bhaṇḍikaṁ bandhitvā sīse ubbāhetvā agamāsi.

     So he spread out his upper robe, shoveled the dry dung onto it, tied it up into a parcel, lifted it on to his head, and went on his way.

551. 551

     तस्सtas·sa अन्तरामग्गेan·ta·rā·mag·ge महाअकालमेघोma·hā·a·kā·la·me·gho पावस्सि।pā·vas·si

     Tassa antarāmagge mahāakālamegho pāvassi.

     While on his way a large storm out of season poured down.

552. 552

     सोso उग्घरन्तंug·gha·ran·taṃ पग्घरन्तंpag·gha·ran·taṃ यावyā·va अग्गनखाag·ga·na·khā गूथेनgū·the·na मक्खितोmak·khi·to गूथभारंgū·tha·bhā·raṃ आदायā·dā·ya अगमासि।a·ga·mā·si

     So uggharantaṁ paggharantaṁ yāva agganakhā gūthena makkhito gūthabhāraṁ ādāya agamāsi.

     Smeared with leaking, oozing dung down to his fingernails, he kept on carrying the load of dung.

553. 553

     तमेनंta·me·naṃ मनुस्साma·nus·sā दिस्वाdis·vā एवमाहंसु:e·va·mā·haṃ·su

     Tamenaṁ manussā disvā evamāhaṁsu:

     When people saw him they said,

554. 554

     ‘कच्चिkac·ci नोno त्वं,tvaṃ भणे,bha·ṇe उम्मत्तो,um·mat·to कच्चिkac·ci विचेतो,vi·ce·to कथञ्हिka·thañ·hi नामnā·ma उग्घरन्तंug·gha·ran·taṃ पग्घरन्तंpag·gha·ran·taṃ यावyā·va अग्गनखाag·ga·na·khā गूथेनgū·the·na मक्खितोmak·khi·to गूथभारंgū·tha·bhā·raṃ हरिस्ससी’ति।ha·ris·sa·sī

     ‘kacci no tvaṁ, bhaṇe, ummatto, kacci viceto, kathañhi nāma uggharantaṁ paggharantaṁ yāva agganakhā gūthena makkhito gūthabhāraṁ harissasī’ti.

     ‘Have you gone mad, lad? Have you lost your mind? For how on earth can you, smeared with leaking, oozing dung down to your fingernails, keep on carrying that load of dung?’

555. 555

     ‘तुम्हेtum·he ख्वेत्थ,khvet·tha भणे,bha·ṇe उम्मत्ता,um·mat·tā तुम्हेtum·he विचेता,vi·ce·tā तथाta·thā हिhi पनpa·na मेme सूकरभत्तन्’ति।sū·ka·ra·bhat·tan

     ‘Tumhe khvettha, bhaṇe, ummattā, tumhe vicetā, tathā hi pana me sūkarabhattan’ti.

     ‘You’re the mad ones, lads! You’re the ones who’ve lost your minds! For this will serve as food for my pigs.’

556. 556

     एवमेवe·va·me·va खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña गूथभारिकूपमोgū·tha·bhā·ri·kū·pa·mo मञ्ञेmañ·ñe पटिभासि।pa·ṭi·bhā·si

     Evameva kho tvaṁ, rājañña, gūthabhārikūpamo maññe paṭibhāsi.

     In the same way, chieftain, you seem like the dung carrier in the simile.

557. 557

     पटिनिस्सज्जेतं,pa·ṭi·nis·saj·je·taṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतं;diṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ पटिनिस्सज्जेतं,pa·ṭi·nis·saj·je·taṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतं।diṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ

     Paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ; paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ.

     Let go of this harmful misconception, chieftain, let go of it!

558. 558

     माmā तेte अहोसिa·ho·si दीघरत्तंdī·gha·rat·taṃ अहितायa·hi·tā·ya दुक्खाया”ति।duk·khā·yā

     Mā te ahosi dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyā”ti.

     Don’t create lasting harm and suffering for yourself!”

559. 559

     “किञ्चापिkiñ·cā·pi भवंbha·vaṃ कस्सपोkas·sa·po एवमाह,e·va·mā·ha अथa·tha खोkho नेवाहंne·vā·haṃ सक्कोमिsak·ko·mi इदंi·daṃ पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतंdiṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ पटिनिस्सज्जितुं।pa·ṭi·nis·saj·ji·tuṃ

     “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho nevāhaṁ sakkomi idaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ paṭinissajjituṁ.

     “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I’m not able to let go of that harmful misconception.

560. 560

     राजापिrā·jā·pi मंmaṃ पसेनदिpa·se·na·di कोसलोko·sa·lo जानातिjā·nā·ti तिरोराजानोपि:ti·ro·rā·jā·no·pi

     Rājāpi maṁ pasenadi kosalo jānāti tirorājānopi:

     King Pasenadi of Kosala knows my views, and so do foreign kings.

561. 561

     ‘पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño एवंवादीe·vaṃ·vā·dī एवंदिट्ठी:e·vaṃ·diṭ·ṭhī

     ‘pāyāsi rājañño evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhī:

     (Pāli only)

562. 562

     “इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोकोlo·ko …पे…pe विपाको”’ति।vi·pā·ko

     “itipi natthi paro loko …pe… vipāko”’ti.

     (Pāli only)

563. 563

     सचाहं,sa·cā·haṃ भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa इदंi·daṃ पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतंdiṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ पटिनिस्सज्जिस्सामि,pa·ṭi·nis·saj·jis·sā·mi भविस्सन्तिbha·vis·san·ti मेme वत्तारो:vat·tā·ro

     Sacāhaṁ, bho kassapa, idaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ paṭinissajjissāmi, bhavissanti me vattāro:

     (Pāli only)

564. 564

     ‘यावyā·va बालोbā·lo पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño अब्यत्तोab·yat·to दुग्गहितगाही’ति।dug·ga·hi·ta·gā·hī

     ‘yāva bālo pāyāsi rājañño abyatto duggahitagāhī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

565. 565

     कोपेनपिko·pe·na·pi नंnaṃ हरिस्सामि,ha·ris·sā·mi मक्खेनपिmak·khe·na·pi नंnaṃ हरिस्सामि,ha·ris·sā·mi पलासेनपिpa·lā·se·na·pi नंnaṃ हरिस्सामी”ति।ha·ris·sā·mī

     Kopenapi naṁ harissāmi, makkhenapi naṁ harissāmi, palāsenapi naṁ harissāmī”ti.

     I shall carry on with this view out of anger, contempt, and spite!”

566. 566

     2।13। अक्खधुत्तकउपमाak·kha·dhut·ta·ka·u·pa·mā

     2.13. Akkhadhuttakaupamā

     2.13. The Simile of the Gamblers

567. 567

     “तेनte·na हि,hi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña उपमंu·pa·maṃ तेte करिस्सामि,ka·ris·sā·mi

     “Tena hi, rājañña, upamaṁ te karissāmi,

     “Well then, chieftain, I shall give you a simile.

568. 568

     उपमायu·pa·mā·ya म्’इधेकच्चेm विञ्ञूviñ·ñū पुरिसाpu·ri·sā भासितस्सbhā·si·tas·sa अत्थंat·thaṃ आजानन्ति।ā·jā·nan·ti

     upamāya m’idhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti.

     For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said.

569. 569

     भूतपुब्बं,bhū·ta·pub·baṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña द्वेdve अक्खधुत्ताak·kha·dhut·tā अक्खेहिak·khe·hi दिब्बिंसु।dib·biṃ·su

     Bhūtapubbaṁ, rājañña, dve akkhadhuttā akkhehi dibbiṁsu.

     Once upon a time, two gamblers were playing with seed dice.

570. 570

     एकोe·ko अक्खधुत्तोak·kha·dhut·to आगतागतंā·ga·tā·ga·taṃ कलिंka·liṃ गिलति।gi·la·ti

     Eko akkhadhutto āgatāgataṁ kaliṁ gilati.

     One gambler, every time they took a bad hand, swallowed the losing seed.

571. 571

     अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho दुतियोdu·ti·yo अक्खधुत्तोak·kha·dhut·to तंtaṃ अक्खधुत्तंak·kha·dhut·taṃ आगतागतंā·ga·tā·ga·taṃ कलिंka·liṃ गिलन्तं,gi·lan·taṃ दिस्वाdis·vā तंtaṃ अक्खधुत्तंak·kha·dhut·taṃ एतदवोच:e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Addasā kho dutiyo akkhadhutto taṁ akkhadhuttaṁ āgatāgataṁ kaliṁ gilantaṁ, disvā taṁ akkhadhuttaṁ etadavoca:

     The second gambler saw him, and said,

572. 572

     ‘त्वंtvaṃ खो,kho सम्म,sam·ma एकन्तिकेनe·kan·ti·ke·na जिनासि,ji·nā·si देहिde·hi मे,me सम्म,sam·ma अक्खेak·khe पजोहिस्सामी’ति।pa·jo·his·sā·mī

     ‘tvaṁ kho, samma, ekantikena jināsi, dehi me, samma, akkhe pajohissāmī’ti.

     ‘Well, dear, you’ve won it all! Give me the seed dice, I will roll them.’

573. 573

     ‘एवं,e·vaṃ सम्मा’तिsam·mā खोkho सोso अक्खधुत्तोak·kha·dhut·to तस्सtas·sa अक्खधुत्तस्सak·kha·dhut·tas·sa अक्खेak·khe पादासि।pā·dā·si

     ‘Evaṁ, sammā’ti kho so akkhadhutto tassa akkhadhuttassa akkhe pādāsi.

     ‘Yes, dear,’ the gambler replied, and gave them.

574. 574

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso अक्खधुत्तोak·kha·dhut·to अक्खेak·khe विसेनvi·se·na परिभावेत्वाpa·ri·bhā·vet·vā तंtaṃ अक्खधुत्तंak·kha·dhut·taṃ एतदवोच:e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho so akkhadhutto akkhe visena paribhāvetvā taṁ akkhadhuttaṁ etadavoca:

     Then the gambler soaked the seed dice in poison and said to the other,

575. 575

     ‘एहिe·hi खो,kho सम्म,sam·ma अक्खेहिak·khe·hi दिब्बिस्सामा’ति।dib·bis·sā·mā

     ‘ehi kho, samma, akkhehi dibbissāmā’ti.

     ‘Come, dear, let’s play seed dice.’

576. 576

     ‘एवं,e·vaṃ सम्मा’तिsam·mā खोkho सोso अक्खधुत्तोak·kha·dhut·to तस्सtas·sa अक्खधुत्तस्सak·kha·dhut·tas·sa पच्चस्सोसि।pac·cas·so·si

     ‘Evaṁ, sammā’ti kho so akkhadhutto tassa akkhadhuttassa paccassosi.

     ‘Yes, dear,’ the other gambler replied.

577. 577

     दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho तेte अक्खधुत्ताak·kha·dhut·tā अक्खेहिak·khe·hi दिब्बिंसु।dib·biṃ·su

     Dutiyampi kho te akkhadhuttā akkhehi dibbiṁsu.

     And for a second time the gamblers played with seed dice.

578. 578

     दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi खोkho सोso अक्खधुत्तोak·kha·dhut·to आगतागतंā·ga·tā·ga·taṃ कलिंka·liṃ गिलति।gi·la·ti

     Dutiyampi kho so akkhadhutto āgatāgataṁ kaliṁ gilati.

     And for the second time, every time they took a bad hand, that gambler swallowed the losing seed.

579. 579

     अद्दसाad·da·sā खोkho दुतियोdu·ti·yo अक्खधुत्तोak·kha·dhut·to तंtaṃ अक्खधुत्तंak·kha·dhut·taṃ दुतियम्पिdu·ti·yam·pi आगतागतंā·ga·tā·ga·taṃ कलिंka·liṃ गिलन्तं,gi·lan·taṃ दिस्वाdis·vā तंtaṃ अक्खधुत्तंak·kha·dhut·taṃ एतदवोच:e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Addasā kho dutiyo akkhadhutto taṁ akkhadhuttaṁ dutiyampi āgatāgataṁ kaliṁ gilantaṁ, disvā taṁ akkhadhuttaṁ etadavoca:

     The second gambler saw him, and said,

580. 580

     ‘लित्तंlit·taṃ परमेनpa·ra·me·na तेजसा,te·ja·sā

     ‘Littaṁ paramena tejasā,

     ‘The man swallows the dice without realizing

581. 581

     गिलमक्खंgi·la·mak·khaṃ पुरिसोpu·ri·so नna बुज्झति;buj·jha·ti

     Gilamakkhaṁ puriso na bujjhati;

     they’re smeared with most terrible venom.

582. 582

     गिलgi·la रेre गिलgi·la पापधुत्तक,pā·pa·dhut·ta·ka

     Gila re gila pāpadhuttaka,

     Swallow, you damn cheat, swallow!

583. 583

     पच्छाpac·chā तेte कटुकंka·ṭu·kaṃ भविस्सती’ति।bha·vis·sa·tī

     Pacchā te kaṭukaṁ bhavissatī’ti.

     Soon you’ll know the bitter fruit!’

584. 584

     एवमेवe·va·me·va खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña अक्खधुत्तकूपमोak·kha·dhut·ta·kū·pa·mo मञ्ञेmañ·ñe पटिभासि।pa·ṭi·bhā·si

     Evameva kho tvaṁ, rājañña, akkhadhuttakūpamo maññe paṭibhāsi.

     In the same way, chieftain, you seem like the gambler in the simile.

585. 585

     पटिनिस्सज्जेतं,pa·ṭi·nis·saj·je·taṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतं;diṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ पटिनिस्सज्जेतं,pa·ṭi·nis·saj·je·taṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतं।diṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ

     Paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ; paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ.

     Let go of this harmful misconception, chieftain, let go of it!

586. 586

     माmā तेte अहोसिa·ho·si दीघरत्तंdī·gha·rat·taṃ अहितायa·hi·tā·ya दुक्खाया”ति।duk·khā·yā

     Mā te ahosi dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyā”ti.

     Don’t create lasting harm and suffering for yourself!”

587. 587

     “किञ्चापिkiñ·cā·pi भवंbha·vaṃ कस्सपोkas·sa·po एवमाह,e·va·mā·ha अथa·tha खोkho नेवाहंne·vā·haṃ सक्कोमिsak·ko·mi इदंi·daṃ पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतंdiṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ पटिनिस्सज्जितुं।pa·ṭi·nis·saj·ji·tuṃ

     “Kiñcāpi bhavaṁ kassapo evamāha, atha kho nevāhaṁ sakkomi idaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ paṭinissajjituṁ.

     “Even though the worthy Kassapa says this, still I’m not able to let go of that harmful misconception.

588. 588

     राजापिrā·jā·pi मंmaṃ पसेनदिpa·se·na·di कोसलोko·sa·lo जानातिjā·nā·ti तिरोराजानोपि:ti·ro·rā·jā·no·pi

     Rājāpi maṁ pasenadi kosalo jānāti tirorājānopi:

     King Pasenadi of Kosala knows my views, and so do foreign kings.

589. 589

     ‘पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño एवंवादीe·vaṃ·vā·dī एवंदिट्ठी:e·vaṃ·diṭ·ṭhī

     ‘pāyāsi rājañño evaṁvādī evaṁdiṭṭhī:

     (Pāli only)

590. 590

     “इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोकोlo·ko …पे…pe विपाको”’ति।vi·pā·ko

     “itipi natthi paro loko …pe… vipāko”’ti.

     (Pāli only)

591. 591

     सचाहं,sa·cā·haṃ भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa इदंi·daṃ पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतंdiṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ पटिनिस्सज्जिस्सामि,pa·ṭi·nis·saj·jis·sā·mi भविस्सन्तिbha·vis·san·ti मेme वत्तारो:vat·tā·ro

     Sacāhaṁ, bho kassapa, idaṁ pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ paṭinissajjissāmi, bhavissanti me vattāro:

     (Pāli only)

592. 592

     ‘यावyā·va बालोbā·lo पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño अब्यत्तोab·yat·to दुग्गहितगाही’ति।dug·ga·hi·ta·gā·hī

     ‘yāva bālo pāyāsi rājañño abyatto duggahitagāhī’ti.

     (Pāli only)

593. 593

     कोपेनपिko·pe·na·pi नंnaṃ हरिस्सामि,ha·ris·sā·mi मक्खेनपिmak·khe·na·pi नंnaṃ हरिस्सामि,ha·ris·sā·mi पलासेनपिpa·lā·se·na·pi नंnaṃ हरिस्सामी”ति।ha·ris·sā·mī

     Kopenapi naṁ harissāmi, makkhenapi naṁ harissāmi, palāsenapi naṁ harissāmī”ti.

     I shall carry on with this view out of anger, contempt, and spite!”

594. 594

     2।14। साणभारिकउपमाsā·ṇa·bhā·ri·ka·u·pa·mā

     2.14. Sāṇabhārikaupamā

     2.14. The Simile of the Man Who Carried Hemp

595. 595

     “तेनte·na हि,hi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña उपमंu·pa·maṃ तेte करिस्सामि,ka·ris·sā·mi

     “Tena hi, rājañña, upamaṁ te karissāmi,

     “Well then, chieftain, I shall give you a simile.

596. 596

     उपमायu·pa·mā·ya म्’इधेकच्चेm विञ्ञूviñ·ñū पुरिसाpu·ri·sā भासितस्सbhā·si·tas·sa अत्थंat·thaṃ आजानन्ति।ā·jā·nan·ti

     upamāya m’idhekacce viññū purisā bhāsitassa atthaṁ ājānanti.

     For by means of a simile some sensible people understand the meaning of what is said.

597. 597

     भूतपुब्बं,bhū·ta·pub·baṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña अञ्ञतरोañ·ña·ta·ro जनपदोja·na·pa·do वुट्ठासि।vuṭ·ṭhā·si

     Bhūtapubbaṁ, rājañña, aññataro janapado vuṭṭhāsi.

     Once upon a time, the inhabitants of a certain country emigrated.

598. 598

     अथa·tha खोkho सहायकोsa·hā·ya·ko सहायकंsa·hā·ya·kaṃ आमन्तेसि:ā·man·te·si

     Atha kho sahāyako sahāyakaṁ āmantesi:

     Then one friend said to another,

599. 599

     ‘आयाम,ā·yā·ma सम्म,sam·ma येनye·na सोso जनपदोja·na·pa·do तेनुपसङ्कमिस्साम,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mis·sā·ma अप्पेवap·pe·va नामेत्थnā·met·tha किञ्चिkiñ·ci धनंdha·naṃ अधिगच्छेय्यामा’ति।a·dhi·gac·chey·yā·mā

     ‘āyāma, samma, yena so janapado tenupasaṅkamissāma, appeva nāmettha kiñci dhanaṁ adhigaccheyyāmā’ti.

     ‘Come, dear, let’s go to that country. Hopefully we’ll get some riches there!’

600. 600

     ‘एवं,e·vaṃ सम्मा’तिsam·mā खोkho सहायकोsa·hā·ya·ko सहायकस्सsa·hā·ya·kas·sa पच्चस्सोसि।pac·cas·so·si

     ‘Evaṁ, sammā’ti kho sahāyako sahāyakassa paccassosi.

     ‘Yes, dear,’ the other replied.

601. 601

     तेte येनye·na सोso जनपदो,ja·na·pa·do येनye·na अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ गामपट्टंgā·ma·paṭ·ṭaṃ तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु,te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su तत्थtat·tha अद्दसंसुad·da·saṃ·su पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ साणंsā·ṇaṃ छड्डितं,chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ दिस्वाdis·vā सहायकोsa·hā·ya·ko सहायकंsa·hā·ya·kaṃ आमन्तेसि:ā·man·te·si

     Te yena so janapado, yena aññataraṁ gāmapaṭṭaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu, tattha addasaṁsu pahūtaṁ sāṇaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā sahāyako sahāyakaṁ āmantesi:

     They went to that country, and to a certain deserted village. There they saw a pile of abandoned sunn hemp. Seeing it, one friend said to the other,

602. 602

     ‘इदंi·daṃ खो,kho सम्म,sam·ma पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ साणंsā·ṇaṃ छड्डितं,chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ तेनte·na हि,hi सम्म,sam·ma त्वञ्चtvañ·ca साणभारंsā·ṇa·bhā·raṃ बन्ध,ban·dha अहञ्चa·hañ·ca साणभारंsā·ṇa·bhā·raṃ बन्धिस्सामि,ban·dhis·sā·mi उभोu·bho साणभारंsā·ṇa·bhā·raṃ आदायā·dā·ya गमिस्सामा’ति।ga·mis·sā·mā

     ‘idaṁ kho, samma, pahūtaṁ sāṇaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, tena hi, samma, tvañca sāṇabhāraṁ bandha, ahañca sāṇabhāraṁ bandhissāmi, ubho sāṇabhāraṁ ādāya gamissāmā’ti.

     ‘This is a pile of abandoned sunn hemp. Well then, dear, you make up a load of hemp, and I’ll make one too. Let’s both take a load of hemp and go on.’

603. 603

     ‘एवं,e·vaṃ सम्मा’तिsam·mā खोkho सहायकोsa·hā·ya·ko सहायकस्सsa·hā·ya·kas·sa पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā साणभारंsā·ṇa·bhā·raṃ बन्धित्वाban·dhit·vā तेte उभोu·bho साणभारंsā·ṇa·bhā·raṃ आदायā·dā·ya येनye·na अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ गामपट्टंgā·ma·paṭ·ṭaṃ तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su

     ‘Evaṁ, sammā’ti kho sahāyako sahāyakassa paṭissutvā sāṇabhāraṁ bandhitvā te ubho sāṇabhāraṁ ādāya yena aññataraṁ gāmapaṭṭaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu.

     ‘Yes, dear,’ he said. Carrying their loads of hemp they went to another deserted village.

604. 604

     तत्थtat·tha अद्दसंसुad·da·saṃ·su पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ साणसुत्तंsā·ṇa·sut·taṃ छड्डितं,chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ दिस्वाdis·vā सहायकोsa·hā·ya·ko सहायकंsa·hā·ya·kaṃ आमन्तेसि:ā·man·te·si

     Tattha addasaṁsu pahūtaṁ sāṇasuttaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā sahāyako sahāyakaṁ āmantesi:

     There they saw much sunn hemp thread abandoned. Seeing it, one friend said to the other,

605. 605

     ‘यस्सyas·sa खो,kho सम्म,sam·ma अत्थायat·thā·ya इच्छेय्यामic·chey·yā·ma साणं,sā·ṇaṃ इदंi·daṃ पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ साणसुत्तंsā·ṇa·sut·taṃ छड्डितं।chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ

     ‘yassa kho, samma, atthāya iccheyyāma sāṇaṁ, idaṁ pahūtaṁ sāṇasuttaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ.

     ‘This pile of abandoned sunn hemp thread is just what we wanted the hemp for!

606. 606

     तेनte·na हि,hi सम्म,sam·ma त्वञ्चtvañ·ca साणभारंsā·ṇa·bhā·raṃ छड्डेहि,chaḍ·ḍe·hi अहञ्चa·hañ·ca साणभारंsā·ṇa·bhā·raṃ छड्डेस्सामि,chaḍ·ḍes·sā·mi उभोu·bho साणसुत्तभारंsā·ṇa·sut·ta·bhā·raṃ आदायā·dā·ya गमिस्सामा’ति।ga·mis·sā·mā

     Tena hi, samma, tvañca sāṇabhāraṁ chaḍḍehi, ahañca sāṇabhāraṁ chaḍḍessāmi, ubho sāṇasuttabhāraṁ ādāya gamissāmā’ti.

     Well then, dear, let’s abandon our loads of hemp, and both take a load of hemp thread and go on.’

607. 607

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ खोkho मे,me सम्म,sam·ma साणभारोsā·ṇa·bhā·ro दूराभतोdū·rā·bha·to चca सुसन्नद्धोsu·san·nad·dho च,ca अलंa·laṃ मे,me त्वंtvaṃ पजानाही’ति।pa·jā·nā·hī

     ‘Ayaṁ kho me, samma, sāṇabhāro dūrābhato ca susannaddho ca, alaṁ me, tvaṁ pajānāhī’ti.

     ‘I’ve already carried this load of hemp a long way, and it’s well tied up. It’s good enough for me, you understand.’

608. 608

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso सहायकोsa·hā·ya·ko साणभारंsā·ṇa·bhā·raṃ छड्डेत्वाchaḍ·ḍet·vā साणसुत्तभारंsā·ṇa·sut·ta·bhā·raṃ आदियि।ā·di·yi

     Atha kho so sahāyako sāṇabhāraṁ chaḍḍetvā sāṇasuttabhāraṁ ādiyi.

     So one friend abandoned their load of hemp and picked up a load of hemp thread.

609. 609

     तेte येनye·na अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ गामपट्टंgā·ma·paṭ·ṭaṃ तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su

     Te yena aññataraṁ gāmapaṭṭaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu.

     They went to another deserted village.

610. 610

     तत्थtat·tha अद्दसंसुad·da·saṃ·su पहूताpa·hū·tā साणियोsā·ṇi·yo छड्डिता,chaḍ·ḍi·tā दिस्वाdis·vā सहायकोsa·hā·ya·ko सहायकंsa·hā·ya·kaṃ आमन्तेसि:ā·man·te·si

     Tattha addasaṁsu pahūtā sāṇiyo chaḍḍitā, disvā sahāyako sahāyakaṁ āmantesi:

     There they saw much sunn hemp cloth abandoned. Seeing it, one friend said to the other,

611. 611

     ‘यस्सyas·sa खो,kho सम्म,sam·ma अत्थायat·thā·ya इच्छेय्यामic·chey·yā·ma साणंsā·ṇaṃ वाvā साणसुत्तंsā·ṇa·sut·taṃ वा,vā इमाi·mā पहूताpa·hū·tā साणियोsā·ṇi·yo छड्डिता।chaḍ·ḍi·tā

     ‘yassa kho, samma, atthāya iccheyyāma sāṇaṁ vā sāṇasuttaṁ vā, imā pahūtā sāṇiyo chaḍḍitā.

     ‘This pile of abandoned sunn hemp cloth is just what we wanted the hemp and hemp thread for!

612. 612

     तेनte·na हि,hi सम्म,sam·ma त्वञ्चtvañ·ca साणभारंsā·ṇa·bhā·raṃ छड्डेहि,chaḍ·ḍe·hi अहञ्चa·hañ·ca साणसुत्तभारंsā·ṇa·sut·ta·bhā·raṃ छड्डेस्सामि,chaḍ·ḍes·sā·mi उभोu·bho साणिभारंsā·ṇi·bhā·raṃ आदायā·dā·ya गमिस्सामा’ति।ga·mis·sā·mā

     Tena hi, samma, tvañca sāṇabhāraṁ chaḍḍehi, ahañca sāṇasuttabhāraṁ chaḍḍessāmi, ubho sāṇibhāraṁ ādāya gamissāmā’ti.

     Well then, dear, let’s abandon our loads, and both take a load of hemp cloth and go on.’

613. 613

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ खोkho मे,me सम्म,sam·ma साणभारोsā·ṇa·bhā·ro दूराभतोdū·rā·bha·to चca सुसन्नद्धोsu·san·nad·dho च,ca अलंa·laṃ मे,me त्वंtvaṃ पजानाही’ति।pa·jā·nā·hī

     ‘Ayaṁ kho me, samma, sāṇabhāro dūrābhato ca susannaddho ca, alaṁ me, tvaṁ pajānāhī’ti.

     ‘I’ve already carried this load of hemp a long way, and it’s well tied up. It’s good enough for me, you understand.’

614. 614

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso सहायकोsa·hā·ya·ko साणसुत्तभारंsā·ṇa·sut·ta·bhā·raṃ छड्डेत्वाchaḍ·ḍet·vā साणिभारंsā·ṇi·bhā·raṃ आदियि।ā·di·yi

     Atha kho so sahāyako sāṇasuttabhāraṁ chaḍḍetvā sāṇibhāraṁ ādiyi.

     So one friend abandoned their load of hemp thread and picked up a load of hemp cloth.

615. 615

     तेte येनye·na अञ्ञतरंañ·ña·ta·raṃ गामपट्टंgā·ma·paṭ·ṭaṃ तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su

     Te yena aññataraṁ gāmapaṭṭaṁ tenupasaṅkamiṁsu.

     They went to another deserted village.

616. 616

     तत्थtat·tha अद्दसंसुad·da·saṃ·su पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ खोमंkho·maṃ छड्डितं,chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ दिस्वाdis·vā …पे…pe

     Tattha addasaṁsu pahūtaṁ khomaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā …pe…

     There they saw a pile of flax, and by turn,

617. 617

     पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ खोमसुत्तंkho·ma·sut·taṃ छड्डितं,chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ दिस्वाdis·vā …

     pahūtaṁ khomasuttaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā …

     linen thread,

618. 618

     पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ खोमदुस्संkho·ma·dus·saṃ छड्डितं,chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ दिस्वाdis·vā …

     pahūtaṁ khomadussaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā …

     linen cloth,

619. 619

     पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ कप्पासंkap·pā·saṃ छड्डितं,chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ दिस्वाdis·vā …

     pahūtaṁ kappāsaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā …

     cotton,

620. 620

     पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ कप्पासिकसुत्तंkap·pā·si·ka·sut·taṃ छड्डितं,chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ दिस्वाdis·vā …

     pahūtaṁ kappāsikasuttaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā …

     cotton thread,

621. 621

     पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ कप्पासिकदुस्संkap·pā·si·ka·dus·saṃ छड्डितं,chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ दिस्वाdis·vā …

     pahūtaṁ kappāsikadussaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā …

     cotton cloth,

622. 622

     पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ अयंa·yaṃ छड्डितं,chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ दिस्वाdis·vā …

     pahūtaṁ ayaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā …

     iron,

623. 623

     पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ लोहंlo·haṃ छड्डितं,chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ दिस्वाdis·vā …

     pahūtaṁ lohaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā …

     copper,

624. 624

     पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ तिपुंti·puṃ छड्डितं,chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ दिस्वाdis·vā …

     pahūtaṁ tipuṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā …

     tin,

625. 625

     पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ सीसंsī·saṃ छड्डितं,chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ दिस्वाdis·vā …

     pahūtaṁ sīsaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā …

     lead,

626. 626

     पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ सज्झंsaj·jhaṃ छड्डितं,chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ दिस्वाdis·vā …

     pahūtaṁ sajjhaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā …

     silver,

627. 627

     पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ सुवण्णंsu·vaṇ·ṇaṃ छड्डितं,chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ दिस्वाdis·vā सहायकोsa·hā·ya·ko सहायकंsa·hā·ya·kaṃ आमन्तेसि:ā·man·te·si

     pahūtaṁ suvaṇṇaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ, disvā sahāyako sahāyakaṁ āmantesi:

     and gold abandoned. Seeing it, one friend said to the other,

628. 628

     ‘यस्सyas·sa खो,kho सम्म,sam·ma अत्थायat·thā·ya इच्छेय्यामic·chey·yā·ma साणंsā·ṇaṃ वाvā साणसुत्तंsā·ṇa·sut·taṃ वाvā साणियोsā·ṇi·yo वाvā खोमंkho·maṃ वाvā खोमसुत्तंkho·ma·sut·taṃ वाvā खोमदुस्संkho·ma·dus·saṃ वाvā कप्पासंkap·pā·saṃ वाvā कप्पासिकसुत्तंkap·pā·si·ka·sut·taṃ वाvā कप्पासिकदुस्संkap·pā·si·ka·dus·saṃ वाvā अयंa·yaṃ वाvā लोहंlo·haṃ वाvā तिपुंti·puṃ वाvā सीसंsī·saṃ वाvā सज्झंsaj·jhaṃ वा,vā इदंi·daṃ पहूतंpa·hū·taṃ सुवण्णंsu·vaṇ·ṇaṃ छड्डितं।chaḍ·ḍi·taṃ

     ‘yassa kho, samma, atthāya iccheyyāma sāṇaṁ vā sāṇasuttaṁ vā sāṇiyo vā khomaṁ vā khomasuttaṁ vā khomadussaṁ vā kappāsaṁ vā kappāsikasuttaṁ vā kappāsikadussaṁ vā ayaṁ vā lohaṁ vā tipuṁ vā sīsaṁ vā sajjhaṁ vā, idaṁ pahūtaṁ suvaṇṇaṁ chaḍḍitaṁ.

     ‘This pile of gold is just what we wanted all those other things for!

629. 629

     तेनte·na हि,hi सम्म,sam·ma त्वञ्चtvañ·ca साणभारंsā·ṇa·bhā·raṃ छड्डेहि,chaḍ·ḍe·hi अहञ्चa·hañ·ca सज्झभारंsaj·jha·bhā·raṃ छड्डेस्सामि,chaḍ·ḍes·sā·mi उभोu·bho सुवण्णभारंsu·vaṇ·ṇa·bhā·raṃ आदायā·dā·ya गमिस्सामा’ति।ga·mis·sā·mā

     Tena hi, samma, tvañca sāṇabhāraṁ chaḍḍehi, ahañca sajjhabhāraṁ chaḍḍessāmi, ubho suvaṇṇabhāraṁ ādāya gamissāmā’ti.

     Well then, dear, let’s abandon our loads, and both take a load of gold and go on.’

630. 630

     ‘अयंa·yaṃ खोkho मे,me सम्म,sam·ma साणभारोsā·ṇa·bhā·ro दूराभतोdū·rā·bha·to चca सुसन्नद्धोsu·san·nad·dho च,ca अलंa·laṃ मेme त्वंtvaṃ पजानाही’ति।pa·jā·nā·hī

     ‘Ayaṁ kho me, samma, sāṇabhāro dūrābhato ca susannaddho ca, alaṁ me tvaṁ pajānāhī’ti.

     ‘I’ve already carried this load of hemp a long way, and it’s well tied up. It’s good enough for me, you understand.’

631. 631

     अथa·tha खोkho सोso सहायकोsa·hā·ya·ko सज्झभारंsaj·jha·bhā·raṃ छड्डेत्वाchaḍ·ḍet·vā सुवण्णभारंsu·vaṇ·ṇa·bhā·raṃ आदियि।ā·di·yi

     Atha kho so sahāyako sajjhabhāraṁ chaḍḍetvā suvaṇṇabhāraṁ ādiyi.

     So one friend abandoned their load of silver and picked up a load of gold.

632. 632

     तेte येनye·na सकोsa·ko गामोgā·mo तेनुपसङ्कमिंसु।te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·miṃ·su

     Te yena sako gāmo tenupasaṅkamiṁsu.

     Then they returned to their own village.

633. 633

     तत्थtat·tha योyo सोso सहायकोsa·hā·ya·ko साणभारंsā·ṇa·bhā·raṃ आदायā·dā·ya अगमासि,a·ga·mā·si तस्सtas·sa नेवne·va मातापितरोmā·tā·pi·ta·ro अभिनन्दिंसु,a·bhi·nan·diṃ·su नna पुत्तदाराput·ta·dā·rā अभिनन्दिंसु,a·bhi·nan·diṃ·su नna मित्तामच्चाmit·tā·mac·cā अभिनन्दिंसु,a·bhi·nan·diṃ·su नna चca ततोनिदानंta·to·ni·dā·naṃ सुखंsu·khaṃ सोमनस्संso·ma·nas·saṃ अधिगच्छि।a·dhi·gac·chi

     Tattha yo so sahāyako sāṇabhāraṁ ādāya agamāsi, tassa neva mātāpitaro abhinandiṁsu, na puttadārā abhinandiṁsu, na mittāmaccā abhinandiṁsu, na ca tatonidānaṁ sukhaṁ somanassaṁ adhigacchi.

     When one friend returned with a load of sunn hemp, they didn’t please their parents, their partners and children, or their friends and colleagues. And they got no pleasure and happiness on that account.

634. 634

     योyo पनpa·na सोso सहायकोsa·hā·ya·ko सुवण्णभारंsu·vaṇ·ṇa·bhā·raṃ आदायā·dā·ya अगमासि,a·ga·mā·si तस्सtas·sa मातापितरोपिmā·tā·pi·ta·ro·pi अभिनन्दिंसु,a·bhi·nan·diṃ·su पुत्तदारापिput·ta·dā·rā·pi अभिनन्दिंसु,a·bhi·nan·diṃ·su मित्तामच्चापिmit·tā·mac·cā·pi अभिनन्दिंसु,a·bhi·nan·diṃ·su ततोनिदानञ्चta·to·ni·dā·nañ·ca सुखंsu·khaṃ सोमनस्संso·ma·nas·saṃ अधिगच्छि।a·dhi·gac·chi

     Yo pana so sahāyako suvaṇṇabhāraṁ ādāya agamāsi, tassa mātāpitaropi abhinandiṁsu, puttadārāpi abhinandiṁsu, mittāmaccāpi abhinandiṁsu, tatonidānañca sukhaṁ somanassaṁ adhigacchi.

     But when the other friend returned with a load of gold, they pleased their parents, their partners and children, and their friends and colleagues. And they got much pleasure and happiness on that account.

635. 635

     एवमेवe·va·me·va खोkho त्वं,tvaṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña साणभारिकूपमोsā·ṇa·bhā·ri·kū·pa·mo मञ्ञेmañ·ñe पटिभासि।pa·ṭi·bhā·si

     Evameva kho tvaṁ, rājañña, sāṇabhārikūpamo maññe paṭibhāsi.

     In the same way, chieftain, you seem like the hemp-carrier in the simile.

636. 636

     पटिनिस्सज्जेतं,pa·ṭi·nis·saj·je·taṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतं;diṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ पटिनिस्सज्जेतं,pa·ṭi·nis·saj·je·taṃ राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña पापकंpā·pa·kaṃ दिट्ठिगतं।diṭ·ṭhi·ga·taṃ

     Paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ; paṭinissajjetaṁ, rājañña, pāpakaṁ diṭṭhigataṁ.

     Let go of this harmful misconception, chieftain, let go of it!

637. 637

     माmā तेte अहोसिa·ho·si दीघरत्तंdī·gha·rat·taṃ अहितायa·hi·tā·ya दुक्खाया”ति।duk·khā·yā

     Mā te ahosi dīgharattaṁ ahitāya dukkhāyā”ti.

     Don’t create lasting harm and suffering for yourself!”

638. 638

     3। सरणगमनsa·ra·ṇa·ga·ma·na

     3. Saraṇagamana

     3. Going for Refuge

639. 639

     “पुरिमेनेवpu·ri·me·ne·va अहंa·haṃ ओपम्मेनo·pam·me·na भोतोbho·to कस्सपस्सkas·sa·pas·sa अत्तमनोat·ta·ma·no अभिरद्धो।a·bhi·rad·dho

     “Purimeneva ahaṁ opammena bhoto kassapassa attamano abhiraddho.

     “I was delighted and satisfied with your very first simile, worthy Kassapa!

640. 640

     अपिa·pi चाहंcā·haṃ इमानिi·mā·ni विचित्रानिvi·cit·rā·ni पञ्हापटिभानानिpañ·hā·pa·ṭi·bhā·nā·ni सोतुकामोso·tu·kā·mo एवाहंe·vā·haṃ भवन्तंbha·van·taṃ कस्सपंkas·sa·paṃ पच्चनीकंpac·ca·nī·kaṃ कातब्बंkā·tab·baṃ अमञ्ञिस्सं।a·mañ·ñis·saṃ

     Api cāhaṁ imāni vicitrāni pañhāpaṭibhānāni sotukāmo evāhaṁ bhavantaṁ kassapaṁ paccanīkaṁ kātabbaṁ amaññissaṁ.

     Nevertheless, I wanted to hear your various solutions to the problem, so I thought I’d oppose you in this way.

641. 641

     अभिक्कन्तं,a·bhik·kan·taṃ भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa अभिक्कन्तं,a·bhik·kan·taṃ भोbho कस्सप।kas·sa·pa

     Abhikkantaṁ, bho kassapa, abhikkantaṁ, bho kassapa.

     Excellent, worthy Kassapa! Excellent!

642. 642

     सेय्यथापि,sey·ya·thā·pi भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa निक्कुज्जितंnik·kuj·ji·taṃ वाvā उक्कुज्जेय्य,uk·kuj·jey·ya पटिच्छन्नंpa·ṭic·chan·naṃ वाvā विवरेय्य,vi·va·rey·ya मूळ्हस्सmū·ḷhas·sa वाvā मग्गंmag·gaṃ आचिक्खेय्य,ā·cik·khey·ya अन्धकारेan·dha·kā·re वाvā तेलपज्जोतंte·la·paj·jo·taṃ धारेय्य:dhā·rey·ya ‘चक्खुमन्तोcak·khu·man·to रूपानिrū·pā·ni दक्खन्ती’ति;dak·khan·tī एवमेवंe·va·me·vaṃ भोताbho·tā कस्सपेनkas·sa·pe·na अनेकपरियायेनa·ne·ka·pa·ri·yā·ye·na धम्मोdham·mo पकासितो।pa·kā·si·to

     Seyyathāpi, bho kassapa, nikkujjitaṁ vā ukkujjeyya, paṭicchannaṁ vā vivareyya, mūḷhassa vā maggaṁ ācikkheyya, andhakāre vā telapajjotaṁ dhāreyya: ‘cakkhumanto rūpāni dakkhantī’ti; evamevaṁ bhotā kassapena anekapariyāyena dhammo pakāsito.

     As if he were righting the overturned, or revealing the hidden, or pointing out the path to the lost, or lighting a lamp in the dark so people with clear eyes can see what’s there, the worthy Kassapa has made the teaching clear in many ways.

643. 643

     एसाहं,e·sā·haṃ भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa तंtaṃ भवन्तंbha·van·taṃ गोतमंgo·ta·maṃ सरणंsa·ra·ṇaṃ गच्छामि,gac·chā·mi धम्मञ्च,dham·mañ·ca भिक्खुसङ्घञ्च।bhik·khu·saṅ·ghañ·ca

     Esāhaṁ, bho kassapa, taṁ bhavantaṁ gotamaṁ saraṇaṁ gacchāmi, dhammañca, bhikkhusaṅghañca.

     I go for refuge to the worthy Gotama, to the teaching, and to the mendicant Saṅgha.

644. 644

     उपासकंu·pā·sa·kaṃ मंmaṃ भवंbha·vaṃ कस्सपोkas·sa·po धारेतुdhā·re·tu अज्जतग्गेaj·ja·tag·ge पाणुपेतंpā·ṇu·pe·taṃ सरणंsa·ra·ṇaṃ गतं।ga·taṃ

     Upāsakaṁ maṁ bhavaṁ kassapo dhāretu ajjatagge pāṇupetaṁ saraṇaṁ gataṁ.

     From this day forth, may the worthy Kassapa remember me as a lay follower who has gone for refuge for life.

645. 645

     इच्छामिic·chā·mi चाहं,cā·haṃ भोbho कस्सप,kas·sa·pa महायञ्ञंma·hā·yañ·ñaṃ यजितुं,ya·ji·tuṃ अनुसासतुa·nu·sā·sa·tu मंmaṃ भवंbha·vaṃ कस्सपो,kas·sa·po यंyaṃ ममस्सma·mas·sa दीघरत्तंdī·gha·rat·taṃ हितायhi·tā·ya सुखाया”ति।su·khā·yā

     Icchāmi cāhaṁ, bho kassapa, mahāyaññaṁ yajituṁ, anusāsatu maṁ bhavaṁ kassapo, yaṁ mamassa dīgharattaṁ hitāya sukhāyā”ti.

     Worthy Kassapa, I wish to perform a great sacrifice. Please instruct me so it will be for my lasting welfare and happiness.”

646. 646

     4। यञ्ञकथाyañ·ña·ka·thā

     4. Yaññakathā

     4. On Sacrifice

647. 647

     “यथारूपेya·thā·rū·pe खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña यञ्ञेyañ·ñe गावोgā·vo वाvā हञ्ञन्तिhañ·ñan·ti अजेळकाa·je·ḷa·kā वाvā हञ्ञन्ति,hañ·ñan·ti कुक्कुटसूकराkuk·ku·ṭa·sū·ka·rā वाvā हञ्ञन्ति,hañ·ñan·ti विविधाvi·vi·dhā वाvā पाणाpā·ṇā सङ्घातंsaṅ·ghā·taṃ आपज्जन्ति,ā·paj·jan·ti पटिग्गाहकाpa·ṭig·gā·ha·kā चca होन्तिhon·ti मिच्छादिट्ठीmic·chā·diṭ·ṭhī मिच्छासङ्कप्पाmic·chā·saṅ·kap·pā मिच्छावाचाmic·chā·vā·cā मिच्छाकम्मन्ताmic·chā·kam·man·tā मिच्छाआजीवाmic·chā·ā·jī·vā मिच्छावायामाmic·chā·vā·yā·mā मिच्छासतीmic·chā·sa·tī मिच्छासमाधी,mic·chā·sa·mā·dhī एवरूपोe·va·rū·po खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña यञ्ञोyañ·ño नna महप्फलोma·hap·pha·lo होतिho·ti नna महानिसंसोma·hā·ni·saṃ·so नna महाजुतिकोma·hā·ju·ti·ko नna महाविप्फारो।ma·hā·vip·phā·ro

     “Yathārūpe kho, rājañña, yaññe gāvo vā haññanti ajeḷakā vā haññanti, kukkuṭasūkarā vā haññanti, vividhā vā pāṇā saṅghātaṁ āpajjanti, paṭiggāhakā ca honti micchādiṭṭhī micchāsaṅkappā micchāvācā micchākammantā micchāājīvā micchāvāyāmā micchāsatī micchāsamādhī, evarūpo kho, rājañña, yañño na mahapphalo hoti na mahānisaṁso na mahājutiko na mahāvipphāro.

     “Chieftain, take the kind of sacrifice where cattle, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, and various kinds of creatures are slaughtered. And the recipients have wrong view, wrong thought, wrong speech, wrong action, wrong livelihood, wrong effort, wrong mindfulness, and wrong immersion. That kind of sacrifice is not very fruitful or beneficial or brilliant or bountiful.

648. 648

     सेय्यथापि,sey·ya·thā·pi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña कस्सकोkas·sa·ko बीजनङ्गलंbī·ja·naṅ·ga·laṃ आदायā·dā·ya वनंva·naṃ पविसेय्य।pa·vi·sey·ya

     Seyyathāpi, rājañña, kassako bījanaṅgalaṁ ādāya vanaṁ paviseyya.

     Suppose a farmer was to enter a wood taking seed and plough.

649. 649

     सोso तत्थtat·tha दुक्खेत्तेduk·khet·te दुब्भूमेdub·bhū·me अविहतखाणुकण्टकेa·vi·ha·ta·khā·ṇu·kaṇ·ṭa·ke बीजानिbī·jā·ni पतिट्ठापेय्यpa·tiṭ·ṭhā·pey·ya खण्डानिkhaṇ·ḍā·ni पूतीनिpū·tī·ni वातातपहतानिvā·tā·ta·pa·ha·tā·ni असारदानिa·sā·ra·dā·ni असुखसयितानि।a·su·kha·sa·yi·tā·ni

     So tattha dukkhette dubbhūme avihatakhāṇukaṇṭake bījāni patiṭṭhāpeyya khaṇḍāni pūtīni vātātapahatāni asāradāni asukhasayitāni.

     And on that barren field, that barren ground, with uncleared stumps he sowed seeds that were broken, spoiled, weather-damaged, infertile, and ill kept.

650. 650

     देवोde·vo चca नna कालेनkā·le·na कालंkā·laṃ सम्माधारंsam·mā·dhā·raṃ अनुप्पवेच्छेय्य।a·nup·pa·vec·chey·ya

     Devo ca na kālena kālaṁ sammādhāraṁ anuppaveccheyya.

     And the heavens don’t provide enough rain when needed.

651. 651

     अपिa·pi नुnu तानिtā·ni बीजानिbī·jā·ni वुद्धिंvud·dhiṃ विरूळ्हिंvi·rū·ḷhiṃ वेपुल्लंve·pul·laṃ आपज्जेय्युं,ā·paj·jey·yuṃ कस्सकोkas·sa·ko वाvā विपुलंvi·pu·laṃ फलंpha·laṃ अधिगच्छेय्या”ति?a·dhi·gac·chey·yā

     Api nu tāni bījāni vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjeyyuṁ, kassako vā vipulaṁ phalaṁ adhigaccheyyā”ti?

     Would those seeds grow, increase, and mature, and would the farmer get abundant fruit?”

652. 652

     “नोno हिदं,hi·daṃ भोbho कस्सप”।kas·sa·pa

     “No hidaṁ, bho kassapa”.

     “No, worthy Kassapa.”

653. 653

     “एवमेवe·va·me·va खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña यथारूपेya·thā·rū·pe यञ्ञेyañ·ñe गावोgā·vo वाvā हञ्ञन्ति,hañ·ñan·ti अजेळकाa·je·ḷa·kā वाvā हञ्ञन्ति,hañ·ñan·ti कुक्कुटसूकराkuk·ku·ṭa·sū·ka·rā वाvā हञ्ञन्ति,hañ·ñan·ti विविधाvi·vi·dhā वाvā पाणाpā·ṇā सङ्घातंsaṅ·ghā·taṃ आपज्जन्ति,ā·paj·jan·ti पटिग्गाहकाpa·ṭig·gā·ha·kā चca होन्तिhon·ti मिच्छादिट्ठीmic·chā·diṭ·ṭhī मिच्छासङ्कप्पाmic·chā·saṅ·kap·pā मिच्छावाचाmic·chā·vā·cā मिच्छाकम्मन्ताmic·chā·kam·man·tā मिच्छाआजीवाmic·chā·ā·jī·vā मिच्छावायामाmic·chā·vā·yā·mā मिच्छासतीmic·chā·sa·tī मिच्छासमाधी,mic·chā·sa·mā·dhī एवरूपोe·va·rū·po खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña यञ्ञोyañ·ño नna महप्फलोma·hap·pha·lo होतिho·ti नna महानिसंसोma·hā·ni·saṃ·so नna महाजुतिकोma·hā·ju·ti·ko नna महाविप्फारो।ma·hā·vip·phā·ro

     “Evameva kho, rājañña, yathārūpe yaññe gāvo vā haññanti, ajeḷakā vā haññanti, kukkuṭasūkarā vā haññanti, vividhā vā pāṇā saṅghātaṁ āpajjanti, paṭiggāhakā ca honti micchādiṭṭhī micchāsaṅkappā micchāvācā micchākammantā micchāājīvā micchāvāyāmā micchāsatī micchāsamādhī, evarūpo kho, rājañña, yañño na mahapphalo hoti na mahānisaṁso na mahājutiko na mahāvipphāro.

     “In the same way, chieftain, take the kind of sacrifice where cattle, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, and various kinds of creatures are slaughtered. And the recipients have wrong view, wrong thought, wrong speech, wrong action, wrong livelihood, wrong effort, wrong mindfulness, and wrong immersion. That kind of sacrifice is not very fruitful or beneficial or brilliant or bountiful.

654. 654

     यथारूपेya·thā·rū·pe चca खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña यञ्ञेyañ·ñe नेवne·va गावोgā·vo हञ्ञन्ति,hañ·ñan·ti नna अजेळकाa·je·ḷa·kā हञ्ञन्ति,hañ·ñan·ti नna कुक्कुटसूकराkuk·ku·ṭa·sū·ka·rā हञ्ञन्ति,hañ·ñan·ti नna विविधाvi·vi·dhā वाvā पाणाpā·ṇā सङ्घातंsaṅ·ghā·taṃ आपज्जन्ति,ā·paj·jan·ti पटिग्गाहकाpa·ṭig·gā·ha·kā चca होन्तिhon·ti सम्मादिट्ठीsam·mā·diṭ·ṭhī सम्मासङ्कप्पाsam·mā·saṅ·kap·pā सम्मावाचाsam·mā·vā·cā सम्माकम्मन्ताsam·mā·kam·man·tā सम्माआजीवाsam·mā·ā·jī·vā सम्मावायामाsam·mā·vā·yā·mā सम्मासतीsam·mā·sa·tī सम्मासमाधी,sam·mā·sa·mā·dhī एवरूपोe·va·rū·po खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña यञ्ञोyañ·ño महप्फलोma·hap·pha·lo होतिho·ti महानिसंसोma·hā·ni·saṃ·so महाजुतिकोma·hā·ju·ti·ko महाविप्फारो।ma·hā·vip·phā·ro

     Yathārūpe ca kho, rājañña, yaññe neva gāvo haññanti, na ajeḷakā haññanti, na kukkuṭasūkarā haññanti, na vividhā vā pāṇā saṅghātaṁ āpajjanti, paṭiggāhakā ca honti sammādiṭṭhī sammāsaṅkappā sammāvācā sammākammantā sammāājīvā sammāvāyāmā sammāsatī sammāsamādhī, evarūpo kho, rājañña, yañño mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso mahājutiko mahāvipphāro.

     But take the kind of sacrifice where cattle, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, and various kinds of creatures are not slaughtered. And the recipients have right view, right thought, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion. That kind of sacrifice is very fruitful and beneficial and brilliant and bountiful.

655. 655

     सेय्यथापि,sey·ya·thā·pi राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña कस्सकोkas·sa·ko बीजनङ्गलंbī·ja·naṅ·ga·laṃ आदायā·dā·ya वनंva·naṃ पविसेय्य।pa·vi·sey·ya

     Seyyathāpi, rājañña, kassako bījanaṅgalaṁ ādāya vanaṁ paviseyya.

     Suppose a farmer was to enter a wood taking seed and plough.

656. 656

     सोso तत्थtat·tha सुखेत्तेsu·khet·te सुभूमेsu·bhū·me सुविहतखाणुकण्टकेsu·vi·ha·ta·khā·ṇu·kaṇ·ṭa·ke बीजानिbī·jā·ni पतिट्ठपेय्यpa·tiṭ·ṭha·pey·ya अखण्डानिa·khaṇ·ḍā·ni अपूतीनिa·pū·tī·ni अवातातपहतानिa·vā·tā·ta·pa·ha·tā·ni सारदानिsā·ra·dā·ni सुखसयितानि।su·kha·sa·yi·tā·ni

     So tattha sukhette subhūme suvihatakhāṇukaṇṭake bījāni patiṭṭhapeyya akhaṇḍāni apūtīni avātātapahatāni sāradāni sukhasayitāni.

     And on that fertile field, that fertile ground, with well-cleared stumps he sowed seeds that were intact, unspoiled, not weather-damaged, fertile, and well kept.

657. 657

     देवोde·vo चca कालेनkā·le·na कालंkā·laṃ सम्माधारंsam·mā·dhā·raṃ अनुप्पवेच्छेय्य।a·nup·pa·vec·chey·ya

     Devo ca kālena kālaṁ sammādhāraṁ anuppaveccheyya.

     And the heavens provide plenty of rain when needed.

658. 658

     अपिa·pi नुnu तानिtā·ni बीजानिbī·jā·ni वुद्धिंvud·dhiṃ विरूळ्हिंvi·rū·ḷhiṃ वेपुल्लंve·pul·laṃ आपज्जेय्युं,ā·paj·jey·yuṃ कस्सकोkas·sa·ko वाvā विपुलंvi·pu·laṃ फलंpha·laṃ अधिगच्छेय्या”ति?a·dhi·gac·chey·yā

     Api nu tāni bījāni vuddhiṁ virūḷhiṁ vepullaṁ āpajjeyyuṁ, kassako vā vipulaṁ phalaṁ adhigaccheyyā”ti?

     Would those seeds grow, increase, and mature, and would the farmer get abundant fruit?”

659. 659

     “एवं,e·vaṃ भोbho कस्सप”।kas·sa·pa

     “Evaṁ, bho kassapa”.

     “Yes, worthy Kassapa.”

660. 660

     “एवमेवe·va·me·va खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña यथारूपेya·thā·rū·pe यञ्ञेyañ·ñe नेवne·va गावोgā·vo हञ्ञन्ति,hañ·ñan·ti नna अजेळकाa·je·ḷa·kā हञ्ञन्ति,hañ·ñan·ti नna कुक्कुटसूकराkuk·ku·ṭa·sū·ka·rā हञ्ञन्ति,hañ·ñan·ti नna विविधाvi·vi·dhā वाvā पाणाpā·ṇā सङ्घातंsaṅ·ghā·taṃ आपज्जन्ति,ā·paj·jan·ti पटिग्गाहकाpa·ṭig·gā·ha·kā चca होन्तिhon·ti सम्मादिट्ठीsam·mā·diṭ·ṭhī सम्मासङ्कप्पाsam·mā·saṅ·kap·pā सम्मावाचाsam·mā·vā·cā सम्माकम्मन्ताsam·mā·kam·man·tā सम्माआजीवाsam·mā·ā·jī·vā सम्मावायामाsam·mā·vā·yā·mā सम्मासतीsam·mā·sa·tī सम्मासमाधी,sam·mā·sa·mā·dhī एवरूपोe·va·rū·po खो,kho राजञ्ञ,rā·jañ·ña यञ्ञोyañ·ño महप्फलोma·hap·pha·lo होतिho·ti महानिसंसोma·hā·ni·saṃ·so महाजुतिकोma·hā·ju·ti·ko महाविप्फारो”ति।ma·hā·vip·phā·ro

     “Evameva kho, rājañña, yathārūpe yaññe neva gāvo haññanti, na ajeḷakā haññanti, na kukkuṭasūkarā haññanti, na vividhā vā pāṇā saṅghātaṁ āpajjanti, paṭiggāhakā ca honti sammādiṭṭhī sammāsaṅkappā sammāvācā sammākammantā sammāājīvā sammāvāyāmā sammāsatī sammāsamādhī, evarūpo kho, rājañña, yañño mahapphalo hoti mahānisaṁso mahājutiko mahāvipphāro”ti.

     “In the same way, chieftain, take the kind of sacrifice where cattle, goats and sheep, chickens and pigs, and various kinds of creatures are not slaughtered. And the recipients have right view, right thought, right speech, right action, right livelihood, right effort, right mindfulness, and right immersion. That kind of sacrifice is very fruitful and beneficial and brilliant and bountiful.”

661. 661

     5। उत्तरमाणववत्थुut·ta·ra·mā·ṇa·va·vat·thu

     5. Uttaramāṇavavatthu

     5. On the Student Uttara

662. 662

     अथa·tha खोkho पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño दानंdā·naṃ पट्ठपेसिpaṭ·ṭha·pe·si समणब्राह्मणकपणद्धिकवणिब्बकयाचकानं।sa·ma·ṇab·rāh·ma·ṇa·ka·pa·ṇad·dhi·ka·va·ṇib·ba·ka·yā·ca·kā·naṃ

     Atha kho pāyāsi rājañño dānaṁ paṭṭhapesi samaṇabrāhmaṇakapaṇaddhikavaṇibbakayācakānaṁ.

     Then the chieftain Pāyāsi set up an offering for ascetics and brahmins, for paupers, vagrants, supplicants, and beggars.

663. 663

     तस्मिंtas·miṃ खोkho पनpa·na दानेdā·ne एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ भोजनंbho·ja·naṃ दीयतिdī·ya·ti कणाजकंka·ṇā·ja·kaṃ बिलङ्गदुतियं,bi·laṅ·ga·du·ti·yaṃ धोरकानिdho·ra·kā·ni चca वत्थानिvat·thā·ni गुळवालकानि।gu·ḷa·vā·la·kā·ni

     Tasmiṁ kho pana dāne evarūpaṁ bhojanaṁ dīyati kaṇājakaṁ bilaṅgadutiyaṁ, dhorakāni ca vatthāni guḷavālakāni.

     At that offering such food as sour gruel with false black pepper was given, and rough clothes with knotted fringes.

664. 664

     तस्मिंtas·miṃ खोkho पनpa·na दानेdā·ne उत्तरोut·ta·ro नामnā·ma माणवोmā·ṇa·vo वावटोvā·va·ṭo अहोसि।a·ho·si

     Tasmiṁ kho pana dāne uttaro nāma māṇavo vāvaṭo ahosi.

     Now, it was a student named Uttara who organized that offering.

665. 665

     सोso दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā एवंe·vaṃ अनुद्दिसति:a·nud·di·sa·ti

     So dānaṁ datvā evaṁ anuddisati:

     When the offering was over he referred to it like this,

666. 666

     “इमिनाहंi·mi·nā·haṃ दानेनdā·ne·na पायासिंpā·yā·siṃ राजञ्ञमेवrā·jañ·ña·me·va इमस्मिंi·mas·miṃ लोकेlo·ke समागच्छिं,sa·mā·gac·chiṃ माmā परस्मिन्”ति।pa·ras·min

     “imināhaṁ dānena pāyāsiṁ rājaññameva imasmiṁ loke samāgacchiṁ, mā parasmin”ti.

     “Through this offering may I be together with the chieftain Pāyāsi in this world, but not in the next.”

667. 667

     अस्सोसिas·so·si खोkho पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञो:rā·jañ·ño

     Assosi kho pāyāsi rājañño:

     Pāyāsi heard of this,

668. 668

     “उत्तरोut·ta·ro किरki·ra माणवोmā·ṇa·vo दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā एवंe·vaṃ अनुद्दिसति:a·nud·di·sa·ti

     “uttaro kira māṇavo dānaṁ datvā evaṁ anuddisati:

     (Pāli only)

669. 669

     ‘इमिनाहंi·mi·nā·haṃ दानेनdā·ne·na पायासिंpā·yā·siṃ राजञ्ञमेवrā·jañ·ña·me·va इमस्मिंi·mas·miṃ लोकेlo·ke समागच्छिं,sa·mā·gac·chiṃ माmā परस्मिन्’”ति।pa·ras·min

     ‘imināhaṁ dānena pāyāsiṁ rājaññameva imasmiṁ loke samāgacchiṁ, mā parasmin’”ti.

     (Pāli only)

670. 670

     अथa·tha खोkho पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño उत्तरंut·ta·raṃ माणवंmā·ṇa·vaṃ आमन्तापेत्वाā·man·tā·pet·vā एतदवोच:e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho pāyāsi rājañño uttaraṁ māṇavaṁ āmantāpetvā etadavoca:

     so he summoned Uttara and said,

671. 671

     “सच्चंsac·caṃ किरki·ra त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta उत्तर,ut·ta·ra दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā एवंe·vaṃ अनुद्दिससि:a·nud·di·sa·si

     “saccaṁ kira tvaṁ, tāta uttara, dānaṁ datvā evaṁ anuddisasi:

     “Is it really true, dear Uttara, that you referred to the offering in this way?”

672. 672

     ‘इमिनाहंi·mi·nā·haṃ दानेनdā·ne·na पायासिंpā·yā·siṃ राजञ्ञमेवrā·jañ·ña·me·va इमस्मिंi·mas·miṃ लोकेlo·ke समागच्छिं,sa·mā·gac·chiṃ माmā परस्मिन्’”ति?pa·ras·min

     ‘imināhaṁ dānena pāyāsiṁ rājaññameva imasmiṁ loke samāgacchiṁ, mā parasmin’”ti?

     (Pāli only)

673. 673

     “एवं,e·vaṃ भो”।bho

     “Evaṁ, bho”.

     “Yes, worthy sir.”

674. 674

     “किस्सkis·sa पनpa·na त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta उत्तर,ut·ta·ra दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā एवंe·vaṃ अनुद्दिससि:a·nud·di·sa·si

     “Kissa pana tvaṁ, tāta uttara, dānaṁ datvā evaṁ anuddisasi:

     “But why?

675. 675

     ‘इमिनाहंi·mi·nā·haṃ दानेनdā·ne·na पायासिंpā·yā·siṃ राजञ्ञमेवrā·jañ·ña·me·va इमस्मिंi·mas·miṃ लोकेlo·ke समागच्छिं,sa·mā·gac·chiṃ माmā परस्मिन्’ति?pa·ras·min

     ‘imināhaṁ dānena pāyāsiṁ rājaññameva imasmiṁ loke samāgacchiṁ, mā parasmin’ti?

     (Pāli only)

676. 676

     ननुna·nu मयं,ma·yaṃ तातtā·ta उत्तर,ut·ta·ra पुञ्ञत्थिकाpuñ·ñat·thi·kā दानस्सेवdā·nas·se·va फलंpha·laṃ पाटिकङ्खिनो”ति?pā·ṭi·kaṅ·khi·no

     Nanu mayaṁ, tāta uttara, puññatthikā dānasseva phalaṁ pāṭikaṅkhino”ti?

     Don’t we who seek merit expect some result from the offering?”

677. 677

     “भोतोbho·to खोkho दानेdā·ne एवरूपंe·va·rū·paṃ भोजनंbho·ja·naṃ दीयतिdī·ya·ti कणाजकंka·ṇā·ja·kaṃ बिलङ्गदुतियं,bi·laṅ·ga·du·ti·yaṃ यंyaṃ भवंbha·vaṃ पादापिpā·dā·pi नna इच्छेय्यic·chey·ya सम्फुसितुं,sam·phu·si·tuṃ कुतोku·to भुञ्जितुं,bhuñ·ji·tuṃ धोरकानिdho·ra·kā·ni चca वत्थानिvat·thā·ni गुळवालकानि,gu·ḷa·vā·la·kā·ni यानिyā·ni भवंbha·vaṃ पादापिpā·dā·pi नna इच्छेय्यic·chey·ya सम्फुसितुं,sam·phu·si·tuṃ कुतोku·to परिदहितुं।pa·ri·da·hi·tuṃ

     “Bhoto kho dāne evarūpaṁ bhojanaṁ dīyati kaṇājakaṁ bilaṅgadutiyaṁ, yaṁ bhavaṁ pādāpi na iccheyya samphusituṁ, kuto bhuñjituṁ, dhorakāni ca vatthāni guḷavālakāni, yāni bhavaṁ pādāpi na iccheyya samphusituṁ, kuto paridahituṁ.

     “At your offering such food as sour gruel with false black pepper was given, which you wouldn’t even want to touch with your foot, much less eat. And also rough clothes with knotted fringes, which you also wouldn’t want to touch with your foot, much less wear.

678. 678

     भवंbha·vaṃ खोkho पनम्हाकंpa·nam·hā·kaṃ पियोpi·yo मनापो,ma·nā·po कथंka·thaṃ मयंma·yaṃ मनापंma·nā·paṃ अमनापेनa·ma·nā·pe·na संयोजेमा”ति?saṃ·yo·je·mā

     Bhavaṁ kho panamhākaṁ piyo manāpo, kathaṁ mayaṁ manāpaṁ amanāpena saṁyojemā”ti?

     Worthy sir, you’re dear and beloved to me. But how can I reconcile one so dear with something so disagreeable?”

679. 679

     “तेनte·na हिhi त्वं,tvaṃ तातtā·ta उत्तर,ut·ta·ra यादिसाहंyā·di·sā·haṃ भोजनंbho·ja·naṃ भुञ्जामि,bhuñ·jā·mi तादिसंtā·di·saṃ भोजनंbho·ja·naṃ पट्ठपेहि।paṭ·ṭha·pe·hi

     “Tena hi tvaṁ, tāta uttara, yādisāhaṁ bhojanaṁ bhuñjāmi, tādisaṁ bhojanaṁ paṭṭhapehi.

     “Well then, dear Uttara, set up an offering with the same kind of food that I eat,

680. 680

     यादिसानिyā·di·sā·ni चाहंcā·haṃ वत्थानिvat·thā·ni परिदहामि,pa·ri·da·hā·mi तादिसानिtā·di·sā·ni चca वत्थानिvat·thā·ni पट्ठपेही”ति।paṭ·ṭha·pe·hī

     Yādisāni cāhaṁ vatthāni paridahāmi, tādisāni ca vatthāni paṭṭhapehī”ti.

     and the same kind of clothes that I wear.”

681. 681

     “एवं,e·vaṃ भो”तिbho खोkho उत्तरोut·ta·ro माणवोmā·ṇa·vo पायासिस्सpā·yā·sis·sa राजञ्ञस्सrā·jañ·ñas·sa पटिस्सुत्वाpa·ṭis·sut·vā यादिसंyā·di·saṃ भोजनंbho·ja·naṃ पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño भुञ्जति,bhuñ·ja·ti तादिसंtā·di·saṃ भोजनंbho·ja·naṃ पट्ठपेसि।paṭ·ṭha·pe·si

     “Evaṁ, bho”ti kho uttaro māṇavo pāyāsissa rājaññassa paṭissutvā yādisaṁ bhojanaṁ pāyāsi rājañño bhuñjati, tādisaṁ bhojanaṁ paṭṭhapesi.

     “Yes, worthy sir,” replied Uttara, and did so.

682. 682

     यादिसानिyā·di·sā·ni चca वत्थानिvat·thā·ni पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño परिदहति,pa·ri·da·ha·ti तादिसानिtā·di·sā·ni चca वत्थानिvat·thā·ni पट्ठपेसि।paṭ·ṭha·pe·si

     Yādisāni ca vatthāni pāyāsi rājañño paridahati, tādisāni ca vatthāni paṭṭhapesi.

     (Pāli only)

683. 683

     अथa·tha खोkho पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño असक्कच्चंa·sak·kac·caṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā असहत्थाa·sa·hat·thā दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā अचित्तीकतंa·cit·tī·ka·taṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā अपविद्धंa·pa·vid·dhaṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā चातुमहाराजिकानंcā·tu·ma·hā·rā·ji·kā·naṃ देवानंde·vā·naṃ सहब्यतंsa·hab·ya·taṃ उपपज्जिu·pa·paj·ji सुञ्ञंsuñ·ñaṃ सेरीसकंse·rī·sa·kaṃ विमानं।vi·mā·naṃ

     Atha kho pāyāsi rājañño asakkaccaṁ dānaṁ datvā asahatthā dānaṁ datvā acittīkataṁ dānaṁ datvā apaviddhaṁ dānaṁ datvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā cātumahārājikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapajji suññaṁ serīsakaṁ vimānaṁ.

     So the chieftain Pāyāsi gave gifts carelessly, thoughtlessly, not with his own hands, giving the dregs. When his body broke up, after death, he was reborn in company with the gods of the four great kings, in an empty palace of sirisa wood.

684. 684

     योyo पनpa·na तस्सtas·sa दानेdā·ne वावटोvā·va·ṭo अहोसिa·ho·si उत्तरोut·ta·ro नामnā·ma माणवो।mā·ṇa·vo सोso सक्कच्चंsak·kac·caṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā सहत्थाsa·hat·thā दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā चित्तीकतंcit·tī·ka·taṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā अनपविद्धंa·na·pa·vid·dhaṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ सग्गंsag·gaṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ उपपज्जिu·pa·paj·ji देवानंde·vā·naṃ तावतिंसानंtā·va·tiṃ·sā·naṃ सहब्यतं।sa·hab·ya·taṃ

     Yo pana tassa dāne vāvaṭo ahosi uttaro nāma māṇavo. So sakkaccaṁ dānaṁ datvā sahatthā dānaṁ datvā cittīkataṁ dānaṁ datvā anapaviddhaṁ dānaṁ datvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapajji devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyataṁ.

     But the student Uttara who organized the offering gave gifts carefully, thoughtfully, with his own hands, not giving the dregs. When his body broke up, after death, he was reborn in company with the gods of the thirty-three.

685. 685

     6। पायासिदेवपुत्तpā·yā·si·de·va·put·ta

     6. Pāyāsidevaputta

     6. The Godling Pāyāsi

686. 686

     तेनte·na खोkho पनpa·na समयेनsa·ma·ye·na आयस्माā·yas·mā गवम्पतिga·vam·pa·ti अभिक्खणंa·bhik·kha·ṇaṃ सुञ्ञंsuñ·ñaṃ सेरीसकंse·rī·sa·kaṃ विमानंvi·mā·naṃ दिवाविहारंdi·vā·vi·hā·raṃ गच्छति।gac·cha·ti

     Tena kho pana samayena āyasmā gavampati abhikkhaṇaṁ suññaṁ serīsakaṁ vimānaṁ divāvihāraṁ gacchati.

     Now at that time Venerable Gavampati would often go to that empty sirisa palace for the day’s meditation.

687. 687

     अथa·tha खोkho पायासिpā·yā·si देवपुत्तोde·va·put·to येनायस्माye·nā·yas·mā गवम्पतिga·vam·pa·ti तेनुपसङ्कमि;te·nu·pa·saṅ·ka·mi उपसङ्कमित्वाu·pa·saṅ·ka·mit·vā आयस्मन्तंā·yas·man·taṃ गवम्पतिंga·vam·pa·tiṃ अभिवादेत्वाa·bhi·vā·det·vā एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ अट्ठासि।aṭ·ṭhā·si एकमन्तंe·ka·man·taṃ ठितंṭhi·taṃ खोkho पायासिंpā·yā·siṃ देवपुत्तंde·va·put·taṃ आयस्माā·yas·mā गवम्पतिga·vam·pa·ti एतदवोच:e·ta·da·vo·ca

     Atha kho pāyāsi devaputto yenāyasmā gavampati tenupasaṅkami; upasaṅkamitvā āyasmantaṁ gavampatiṁ abhivādetvā ekamantaṁ aṭṭhāsi. Ekamantaṁ ṭhitaṁ kho pāyāsiṁ devaputtaṁ āyasmā gavampati etadavoca:

     Then the godling Pāyāsi went up to him, bowed, and stood to one side. Gavampati said to him,

688. 688

     “कोसिko·si त्वं,tvaṃ आवुसो”ति?ā·vu·so

     “kosi tvaṁ, āvuso”ti?

     “Who are you, reverend?”

689. 689

     “अहं,a·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञो”ति।rā·jañ·ño

     “Ahaṁ, bhante, pāyāsi rājañño”ti.

     “Sir, I am the chieftain Pāyāsi.”

690. 690

     “ननुna·nu त्वं,tvaṃ आवुसो,ā·vu·so एवंदिट्ठिकोe·vaṃ·diṭ·ṭhi·ko अहोसि:a·ho·si

     “Nanu tvaṁ, āvuso, evaṁdiṭṭhiko ahosi:

     “Didn’t you have the view that

691. 691

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’”ति?vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’”ti?

     there is no afterlife, no beings are reborn spontaneously, and there’s no fruit or result of good and bad deeds?”

692. 692

     “सच्चाहं,sac·cā·haṃ भन्ते,bhan·te एवंदिट्ठिकोe·vaṃ·diṭ·ṭhi·ko अहोसिं:a·ho·siṃ

     “Saccāhaṁ, bhante, evaṁdiṭṭhiko ahosiṁ:

     “It’s true, sir, I did have such a view.

693. 693

     ‘इतिपिi·ti·pi नत्थिnat·thi परोpa·ro लोको,lo·ko नत्थिnat·thi सत्ताsat·tā ओपपातिका,o·pa·pā·ti·kā नत्थिnat·thi सुकतदुक्कटानंsu·ka·ta·duk·ka·ṭā·naṃ कम्मानंkam·mā·naṃ फलंpha·laṃ विपाको’ति।vi·pā·ko

     ‘itipi natthi paro loko, natthi sattā opapātikā, natthi sukatadukkaṭānaṁ kammānaṁ phalaṁ vipāko’ti.

     (Pāli only)

694. 694

     अपिa·pi चाहंcā·haṃ अय्येनay·ye·na कुमारकस्सपेनku·mā·ra·kas·sa·pe·na एतस्माe·tas·mā पापकाpā·pa·kā दिट्ठिगताdiṭ·ṭhi·ga·tā विवेचितो”ति।vi·ve·ci·to

     Api cāhaṁ ayyena kumārakassapena etasmā pāpakā diṭṭhigatā vivecito”ti.

     But Master Kassapa the Prince dissuaded me from that harmful misconception.”

695. 695

     “योyo पनpa·na ते,te आवुसो,ā·vu·so दानेdā·ne वावटोvā·va·ṭo अहोसिa·ho·si उत्तरोut·ta·ro नामnā·ma माणवो,mā·ṇa·vo सोso कुहिंku·hiṃ उपपन्नो”ति?u·pa·pan·no

     “Yo pana te, āvuso, dāne vāvaṭo ahosi uttaro nāma māṇavo, so kuhiṁ upapanno”ti?

     “But the student named Uttara who organized that offering for you—where has he been reborn?”

696. 696

     “योyo मे,me भन्ते,bhan·te दानेdā·ne वावटोvā·va·ṭo अहोसिa·ho·si उत्तरोut·ta·ro नामnā·ma माणवो,mā·ṇa·vo सोso सक्कच्चंsak·kac·caṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā सहत्थाsa·hat·thā दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā चित्तीकतंcit·tī·ka·taṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā अनपविद्धंa·na·pa·vid·dhaṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ सग्गंsag·gaṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ उपपन्नोu·pa·pan·no देवानंde·vā·naṃ तावतिंसानंtā·va·tiṃ·sā·naṃ सहब्यतं।sa·hab·ya·taṃ

     “Yo me, bhante, dāne vāvaṭo ahosi uttaro nāma māṇavo, so sakkaccaṁ dānaṁ datvā sahatthā dānaṁ datvā cittīkataṁ dānaṁ datvā anapaviddhaṁ dānaṁ datvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapanno devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyataṁ.

     “Sir, Uttara gave gifts carefully, thoughtfully, with his own hands, not giving the dregs. When his body broke up, after death, he was reborn in company with the gods of the thirty-three.

697. 697

     अहंa·haṃ पन,pa·na भन्ते,bhan·te असक्कच्चंa·sak·kac·caṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā असहत्थाa·sa·hat·thā दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā अचित्तीकतंa·cit·tī·ka·taṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā अपविद्धंa·pa·vid·dhaṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā चातुमहाराजिकानंcā·tu·ma·hā·rā·ji·kā·naṃ देवानंde·vā·naṃ सहब्यतंsa·hab·ya·taṃ उपपन्नोu·pa·pan·no सुञ्ञंsuñ·ñaṃ सेरीसकंse·rī·sa·kaṃ विमानं।vi·mā·naṃ

     Ahaṁ pana, bhante, asakkaccaṁ dānaṁ datvā asahatthā dānaṁ datvā acittīkataṁ dānaṁ datvā apaviddhaṁ dānaṁ datvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā cātumahārājikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapanno suññaṁ serīsakaṁ vimānaṁ.

     But I gave gifts carelessly, thoughtlessly, not with my own hands, giving the dregs. When my body broke up, after death, I was reborn in company with the gods of the four great kings, in an empty sirisa palace.

698. 698

     तेनte·na हि,hi भन्तेbhan·te गवम्पति,ga·vam·pa·ti मनुस्सलोकंma·nus·sa·lo·kaṃ गन्त्वाgan·tvā एवमारोचेहि:e·va·mā·ro·ce·hi

     Tena hi, bhante gavampati, manussalokaṁ gantvā evamārocehi:

     So, sir, when you’ve returned to the human realm, please announce this:

699. 699

     ‘सक्कच्चंsak·kac·caṃ दानंdā·naṃ देथ,de·tha सहत्थाsa·hat·thā दानंdā·naṃ देथ,de·tha चित्तीकतंcit·tī·ka·taṃ दानंdā·naṃ देथ,de·tha अनपविद्धंa·na·pa·vid·dhaṃ दानंdā·naṃ देथ।de·tha

     ‘sakkaccaṁ dānaṁ detha, sahatthā dānaṁ detha, cittīkataṁ dānaṁ detha, anapaviddhaṁ dānaṁ detha.

     ‘Give gifts carefully, thoughtfully, with your own hands, not giving the dregs.

700. 700

     पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño असक्कच्चंa·sak·kac·caṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā असहत्थाa·sa·hat·thā दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā अचित्तीकतंa·cit·tī·ka·taṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā अपविद्धंa·pa·vid·dhaṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā चातुमहाराजिकानंcā·tu·ma·hā·rā·ji·kā·naṃ देवानंde·vā·naṃ सहब्यतंsa·hab·ya·taṃ उपपन्नोu·pa·pan·no सुञ्ञंsuñ·ñaṃ सेरीसकंse·rī·sa·kaṃ विमानं।vi·mā·naṃ

     Pāyāsi rājañño asakkaccaṁ dānaṁ datvā asahatthā dānaṁ datvā acittīkataṁ dānaṁ datvā apaviddhaṁ dānaṁ datvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā cātumahārājikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapanno suññaṁ serīsakaṁ vimānaṁ.

     The chieftain Pāyāsi gave gifts carelessly, thoughtlessly, not with his own hands, giving the dregs. When his body broke up, after death, he was reborn in company with the gods of the four great kings, in an empty palace of sirisa.

701. 701

     योyo पनpa·na तस्सtas·sa दानेdā·ne वावटोvā·va·ṭo अहोसिa·ho·si उत्तरोut·ta·ro नामnā·ma माणवो,mā·ṇa·vo सोso सक्कच्चंsak·kac·caṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā सहत्थाsa·hat·thā दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā चित्तीकतंcit·tī·ka·taṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā अनपविद्धंa·na·pa·vid·dhaṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ सग्गंsag·gaṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ उपपन्नोu·pa·pan·no देवानंde·vā·naṃ तावतिंसानंtā·va·tiṃ·sā·naṃ सहब्यतन्’”ति।sa·hab·ya·tan

     Yo pana tassa dāne vāvaṭo ahosi uttaro nāma māṇavo, so sakkaccaṁ dānaṁ datvā sahatthā dānaṁ datvā cittīkataṁ dānaṁ datvā anapaviddhaṁ dānaṁ datvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapanno devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyatan’”ti.

     But the student Uttara who organized the offering gave gifts carefully, thoughtfully, with his own hands, not giving the dregs. When his body broke up, after death, he was reborn in company with the gods of the thirty-three.’”

702. 702

     अथa·tha खोkho आयस्माā·yas·mā गवम्पतिga·vam·pa·ti मनुस्सलोकंma·nus·sa·lo·kaṃ आगन्त्वाā·gan·tvā एवमारोचेसि:e·va·mā·ro·ce·si

     Atha kho āyasmā gavampati manussalokaṁ āgantvā evamārocesi:

     So when Venerable Gavampati returned to the human realm he made that announcement.

703. 703

     “सक्कच्चंsak·kac·caṃ दानंdā·naṃ देथ,de·tha सहत्थाsa·hat·thā दानंdā·naṃ देथ,de·tha चित्तीकतंcit·tī·ka·taṃ दानंdā·naṃ देथ,de·tha अनपविद्धंa·na·pa·vid·dhaṃ दानंdā·naṃ देथ।de·tha

     “sakkaccaṁ dānaṁ detha, sahatthā dānaṁ detha, cittīkataṁ dānaṁ detha, anapaviddhaṁ dānaṁ detha.

     (Pāli only)

704. 704

     पायासिpā·yā·si राजञ्ञोrā·jañ·ño असक्कच्चंa·sak·kac·caṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā असहत्थाa·sa·hat·thā दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā अचित्तीकतंa·cit·tī·ka·taṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā अपविद्धंa·pa·vid·dhaṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā चातुमहाराजिकानंcā·tu·ma·hā·rā·ji·kā·naṃ देवानंde·vā·naṃ सहब्यतंsa·hab·ya·taṃ उपपन्नोu·pa·pan·no सुञ्ञंsuñ·ñaṃ सेरीसकंse·rī·sa·kaṃ विमानं।vi·mā·naṃ

     Pāyāsi rājañño asakkaccaṁ dānaṁ datvā asahatthā dānaṁ datvā acittīkataṁ dānaṁ datvā apaviddhaṁ dānaṁ datvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā cātumahārājikānaṁ devānaṁ sahabyataṁ upapanno suññaṁ serīsakaṁ vimānaṁ.

     (Pāli only)

705. 705

     योyo पनpa·na तस्सtas·sa दानेdā·ne वावटोvā·va·ṭo अहोसिa·ho·si उत्तरोut·ta·ro नामnā·ma माणवो,mā·ṇa·vo सोso सक्कच्चंsak·kac·caṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā सहत्थाsa·hat·thā दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā चित्तीकतंcit·tī·ka·taṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā अनपविद्धंa·na·pa·vid·dhaṃ दानंdā·naṃ दत्वाdat·vā कायस्सkā·yas·sa भेदाbhe·dā परंpa·raṃ मरणाma·ra·ṇā सुगतिंsu·ga·tiṃ सग्गंsag·gaṃ लोकंlo·kaṃ उपपन्नोu·pa·pan·no देवानंde·vā·naṃ तावतिंसानंtā·va·tiṃ·sā·naṃ सहब्यतन्”ति।sa·hab·ya·tan

     Yo pana tassa dāne vāvaṭo ahosi uttaro nāma māṇavo, so sakkaccaṁ dānaṁ datvā sahatthā dānaṁ datvā cittīkataṁ dānaṁ datvā anapaviddhaṁ dānaṁ datvā kāyassa bhedā paraṁ maraṇā sugatiṁ saggaṁ lokaṁ upapanno devānaṁ tāvatiṁsānaṁ sahabyatan”ti.

     (Pāli only)

706. 706

     पायासिसुत्तंpā·yā·si·sut·taṃ निट्ठितंniṭ·ṭhi·taṃ दसमं।da·sa·maṃ

     Pāyāsisuttaṁ niṭṭhitaṁ dasamaṁ.

     (Pāli only)

707. 707

     महावग्गोma·hā·vag·go निट्ठितो।niṭ·ṭhi·to

     Mahāvaggo niṭṭhito.

     (Pāli only)

708. 708

     तस्सुद्दानंtas·sud·dā·naṃ

     Tassuddānaṁ

     (Pāli only)

709. 709

     महापदानma·hā·pa·dā·na निदानं,ni·dā·naṃ

     Mahāpadāna nidānaṁ,

     (Pāli only)

710. 710

     निब्बानञ्चnib·bā·nañ·ca सुदस्सनं;su·das·sa·naṃ

     nibbānañca sudassanaṁ;

     (Pāli only)

711. 711

     जनवसभja·na·va·sa·bha गोविन्दं,go·vin·daṃ

     Janavasabha govindaṁ,

     (Pāli only)

712. 712

     समयंsa·ma·yaṃ सक्कपञ्हकं;sak·ka·pañ·ha·kaṃ

     samayaṁ sakkapañhakaṁ;

     (Pāli only)

713. 713

     महासतिपट्ठानञ्च,ma·hā·sa·ti·paṭ·ṭhā·nañ·ca

     Mahāsatipaṭṭhānañca,

     (Pāli only)

714. 714

     पायासिpā·yā·si दसमंda·sa·maṃ भवे।bha·ve

     pāyāsi dasamaṁ bhave.

     (Pāli only)

715. 715

     महावग्गपाळिma·hā·vag·ga·pā·ḷi निट्ठिता।niṭ·ṭhi·tā

     Mahāvaggapāḷi niṭṭhitā.

     (Pāli only)

Sources. Sanskrit: Satyavedaḥ, the New Testament in Sanskrit (Calcutta Baptist Missionaries, 1851; J. Wenger’s revision of W. Carey’s version). Digital text © 2018 SanskritBible.in, via eBible.org, licensed CC BY-SA 4.0; changed here: arranged by verse and every word linked to the dictionary (links made automatically). Old Testament Sanskrit: the Old Testament in Sanskrit, Calcutta Baptist Mission Press, 1848–1852 (public domain), read by OCR from the Internet Archive scans of the Boston University School of Theology copy; unproofread, with machine clean-up only. Pāli Canon: Mahāsaṅgīti Tipiṭaka Buddhavasse 2500 (based on the Vipassana Research Institute’s Chaṭṭha Saṅgāyana edition), from SuttaCentral bilara-data, CC0; Devanagari and pronunciation made automatically from the Roman text. Pāli English: Bhikkhu Sujato (suttas) and Bhikkhu Brahmali (Vinaya), SuttaCentral, CC0. Pāli word meanings: the Pali Text Society’s Pali-English Dictionary (Rhys Davids & Stede), corrected reprint © The Pali Text Society, CC BY-NC 3.0, digital text from BuddhaDust; word matching automatic. English: King James Version (1769), public domain; words the translators added are in italics. Word meanings and pronunciations: Monier-Williams, Sanskrit–English Dictionary (1872), via this site’s Sanskrit dictionary (CC BY-SA 4.0); English↔Sanskrit word matches made automatically and may need checking.